YFP 146: COVID-19: Financial Considerations


COVID-19: Financial Considerations

Things are changing on a daily basis secondary to COVID-19. In these unprecedented times, there are a lot of financial concerns people are likely having. On this episode sponsored by APhA, Tim Baker, CFP® answers questions about investing, the uncertainty of work and student loans.

Summary

This podcast is from the APhA and YFP webinar recorded on March 31, 2020. In the past couple of weeks, so much has changed as a result of COVID-19. Between the stock market being down, unemployment rising, the CARES Act and rapid changes with federal student loans, it’s likely that you have a lot of questions regarding your finances.

During this discussion, Tim Baker, CFP® answers the questions everyone has at the top of their mind and focuses on the topics of investments, uncertainty of work and student loans. He also dives into the CARES Act and the levers you can pull if you’re facing financial hardship due to unemployment or a reduction in hours.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Well, good evening and welcome to this webinar. My name is Tim Ulbrich from the team over at Your Financial Pharmacist, and I’m excited to also have joining me my partner in crime and Certified Financial Planner Tim Baker as we’re going to talk about a big-time topic right now, which is financial considerations and COVID-19. So thank you so much for taking time out of your schedule to be here tonight. Thank you for those that during the registration process, you submitted questions and concerns that you have. That really helped us shape how we’ll spend our time this evening. And we’re also going to have time to take your questions throughout the evening as well. So thank you again. And first and foremost, before we jump in to individual topics, I know many listening or perhaps those that couldn’t be here tonight that will watch the replay are on the frontlines of this, putting themselves at risk and obviously stress that comes along with that and carrying that risk back home. So thank you so much for the work that you’re doing for the patients that you’re serving. And we certainly appreciate that effort.

So so many financial issues that are swirling around a time like this. And we’re going to try to hit some of the major ones, certainly not all of them knowing there’s so much changing so quickly, literally some days it seems like by the hour. At least by the day, we have some piece of news that’s coming out as it relates to COVID-19 and something related to the financial plan. If we look at just the past couple weeks as an example, we’ve seen the markets really take a significant hit. As of this morning, the Dow Jones was down roughly 25% from its February peak. And we actually saw that was inching closer to 40% last week before we saw an increase at the end of last week. Unemployment rate predictions are upwards of 30%. We certainly hope that many pharmacists aren’t going to be in that figure, but we’ve already seen a significant rise in unemployment claims in this area. We saw news of the fed cutting interest rates. And in one week, we had three pieces of big news related to student loans. First, the announcement from the Trump administration that we would be freezing interest rates on student loans for 60 days. Then, the announcement that there would be a pause of payments due for a 60-day period. And then of course, with the stimulus package that was passed last Friday, ultimately as we’ll talk about in more detail tonight, six-month window on most federal loans in terms of pausing the payments as well as interest accrual during that time. So certainly big news here in the last couple weeks as it relates to student loans.

So lots of things to talk about, and a brief introduction to the format. Then we’ll jump right in, and I’m going to put Tim Baker on the hot seat and start firing away your questions as we talk about really three big buckets of topics that we saw come through as themes when you all registered for this webinar this evening. One was around investments, you know, what do I do in terms of my investments during an uncertain time period such as this? How does my investing strategy change? So we’ll talk about that in detail. The second around the uncertainty of work and what this time period means in terms of employment and changes and we know some of you may be dealing with this more for others. And how does that impact the financial plan? And what could you be doing during this time of uncertainty? And then last of course would be student loans. And as I mentioned earlier, there’s a lot, a lot to talk about here. So in terms of the format, what we’re going to do is I have gathered some questions in advance, and I’m going to fire away at Tim Baker in each one of these three areas: investments, work uncertainty, and student loans. And then we’ll pause at the end of each of those sections to answer some of your questions. We may not get to all of them, but we’ll try to get to as many as we possibly can this evening. So if you have a question as you’re hearing some of the discussion this evening, please go ahead and submit that in the chat, and then I’m going to ask Drew from APhA, who’s on the call this evening, to help us field those questions and we’ll take a couple breaks throughout.

I do want to thank before we get started as well the American Pharmacists Association for the continued partnership that we have with Your Financial Pharmacist to provide financial education resources that are exclusive to APhA members. So this is one example, but we’ve been doing webinars often and live events. We have discounts on our products and services, including comprehensive financial planning, which you can learn more about at YFPPlanning.com. So to check out a lot of the resources that we’ve done with APhA, you can go to pharmacists.com/YFP and get more information about that partnership and even go back and watch some of the webinars that we’ve done over the past couple years.

Alright, Tim Baker, officially welcome. That was a long introduction, but welcome.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And I know this is a chaotic time, so thank you for taking time out of your schedule to do this.

Tim Baker: Yeah, of course. Happy to be here.

Tim Ulbrich: So we know that many of your clients at Your Financial Pharmacist certainly are having a lot of questions. So many of these you probably already have gotten, but we’re going to go through, as I mentioned, each of these in more detail in three different buckets. So let’s start with investments. And I think probably the most common question that we’re seeing in a time period such as this, which is really similar — while the situation is different — similar market drops to what we saw in 2008 is what should I be doing as I think about my account being down? So the question here is my accounts are down 25% — so assuming your retirement accounts — from mid-February. How should my investing strategy change during this uncertain time where it appears there’s no end in sight to this pandemic and the havoc that it’s wreaking? So talk to us about investment strategy broadly during a time period like this.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so — again, if people have heard me answer these questions, I’m going to start off with the worst answer ever. It’s going to depend. So a lot of our listeners are 20-something, 30-something, 40-something year-olds. And if your portfolio goes down now and you’re planning to retire when you’re 50, 60, 70, it doesn’t matter that much. Now, I don’t want to be facetious in saying that because it’s still painful when you look at hey, I had $200,000 in my portfolio and now I have $160,000 or something to that effect. That’s never fun, and we as human, those losses that we feel, the loss aversion really takes hold of us and it’s not fun. But the fact of the matter is that in most cases, these types of corrections, which last time was a subprime mortgage crisis that was created by kind of poor lending practices, this is a pandemic. I thought we were going to have kind of a downturn in the market due to an election. But this is kind of something that’s come out of nowhere, in essence, that’s really affected the market. And typically, these types of things, they last in the long run three years, three and a half years. So again, if you’re — I’m 37. I’ll use my example. If I’m going to work until I’m 67, that’s 30 years. I’m probably not going to even remember this unless I think about all of the Netflix I watched or the Zoom conferences that I had with my family, the games that we played. So now, the equation is a little bit different if you are kind of further along and closer to retirement. So probably some of the worst years to take a recession or to take a hit in your portfolio is right as you’re about to retire. So you know, 2, 3, 4, 5 years out. And the reason for that is when you start withdrawing on your portfolio in retirement, now you’re taking principal out, and you have to make up those gains that much more. So going through the eye of the storm in retirement is kind of like the couple years out to a couple years into retirement, which is when you probably want to be the most conservative. So depending on what side of the coin you’re on, that’s going to be a big part of it. Now, I was talking with a counterpart that said, hey, a bunch of his clients are reaching out and they’re like, how am I doing? And most of his clients are OK because he’s built out basically a bond ladder to get them through recession-like downturns in the market. So they’re basically priming that and maybe a little bit too much for this particular talk, but it really depends on where you’re at. So I would say as a general principle, a general rule of thumb with investments, you typically want to do the opposite of how you feel. So you know, when the subprime mortgage crisis was going on or right before the subprime mortgage crisis, people were taking out money from everywhere to buy real estate. When the dot-com crisis happened, right at the peak of that, people were taking out second mortgages on their house to buy cats.com. So in that case, we know that the markets probably inflated, and we want to be a little bit more conservative. I’m not saying do anything vastly different, but in the downturn, you know, when we see that slight, that drawdown, we typically want to take our investment ball and go home. So that’s what I tell my clients is that you don’t want to take your investment ball and go home. You actually want to do the opposite. You want to keep playing. If you can, you want to play some more, which means that if you are in a good cash position, get money to the market. Now, I often — and I said this last time we talked about this — sometimes I think financial advisors or we as humans, we rationalize away the loss and we’ll say, oh, it’s a great time to buy. It is kind of because when Trump was elected last time, I’m like, oh, the market, it’s overpriced, we’re going to see a correction, not a great time to buy. And that’s kind of the levels we’re at now. So it’s relative, right? But to me, the rule of thumb here is typically the more that you do, the worse. The more tinkering, the more you try to like outfool, outplay the market, it’s not going to work. You know, best rule of thumb is if you’re kind of in this situation where you’re in this accumulation phase, if you can invest more, invest more. If you can be a little bit more aggressive, be a little bit more aggressive. I often say that if you’re kind of in your 20s, 30s and 40s, you probably shouldn’t have any bonds in your portfolio at all. That’s my belief just because basically they’re a drag on your investments. When you get closer to retirement and there’s more safety in principal, then you want to put bonds in there and start really building out kind of that retirement paycheck, that bond ladder. So lots of words, lot of different ways to look at that. At the end of the day, this too shall pass. Markets will go up, it’s part of the general cycle of things. We’re basically being forced into this one a little bit more because of the pandemic, but we were also on an 11-year bull market, a positive market, really since the last downturn. So yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, great stuff. And Tim, this really has been a reminder for me in a couple areas. It’s something we preach and teach, but when it hits you directly, it’s a gut check to say, do I really believe in what I preach and teach? And you know, we talk about volatility and the irrationality of the markets and who can predict it, what a great example this has been. I mean, nobody can say they — now, some people might say I saw a bubble and it was eventually going to pop, yadda yadda yadda ya, but nobody predicted COVID-19 specifically. Maybe Bill Gates. But nobody predicted the impact that that would have at this time period and obviously the unemployment, all the impacts we’ve had. But also I think it’s just been a good reminder of some of the investing principles and strategies that I know I’m highly leveraged in stocks, you see a significant drop, I log into my accounts, I want to take action. I know I shouldn’t take action, so for me, this has also been a really good reminder of the value of having a coach in your corner, on your team, in a time period like this to really help you take a step back and look at the whole plan and to really go back and think, what’s the goal? What are we trying to do? What’s the timeline? And a period like this quickly becomes very emotional, not objective, and I think having somebody else that can really help you navigate a difficult time like this is a great reminder.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and my overall belief — I have a few of them — but my overall belief for investments is that investments should be as boring and budgeting. It should be as boring as paying off the debt. It should not be sexy, it shouldn’t be exciting. I think oftentimes when we make it that, that’s where we get into trouble because we’re typically going into investments that maybe cost too much. So when you think about like, oh, this is a smart beta fund, it’s going to cost the investor a lot of money. You know, even I am like, oh man, maybe I should buy this stock because it’s trading really low. And the example I gave the last time we talked about this is you know, when we had corrections in the ‘80s and ‘90s, my first employer out of the Army was Sears. Sears was this giant company that was never going to go away, it was retail supreme, kind of like the Amazon of today. It’s trading at like $.31 a share right now because they just were — so everyone thinks well maybe Amazon — I don’t think Amazon shares are down — but maybe that other, that Walmart or that other stock. So you start twisting your mustache to say hey, maybe I can outsmart the market, maybe this is a great time to buy. And my belief — and again, I do this for a living — is I just become overwhelmingly humbled again and again by that. So you can — I think it’s OK, my personal opinion, to take a small percent, 5-10%, and speculate on stocks. I don’t personally do it anymore because I, again, I’m tired of being humbled by the market. I like to buy the market. It treats you right over the long term and just rebalance it over time. So one of the things that I think you can do if you’re up for it is that if you’re not in something like a target date fund, you know, when I’m reviewing — I reviewed a client’s patient, actually one of the clients are about to be forgiven for PSLF. They’re two months away. Yeah, one of the things that we looked at their TSP and the spouse’s 401k, very out of balance in terms of like their equity to fixed income ratio. So one of the things we were going to go do — and we can do this for them with some of the tools that we have — is we basically rebalance that back because right now their portfolio is more conservative than what they signed up because equities are depressed and as a result, the fixed income makes up a bigger percentage. So we’re basically going to rebalance those out. Now, my counsel to them is get rid of the bonds in general. They’re about my age, a little bit older. But they’re kind of in a 90-10 stocks to bonds split. So that’s maybe one thing that you can do to tinker or change. And in reality, you should do that once or twice per year. And I think that’s good.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think that’s a good reminder. I haven’t seen a lot of discussion on in this area of investing is making sure you’re looking at your distributions and rebalancing appropriately as a time period like this can certainly throw things off. So to your comment, you alluded to this, and I’d like to talk more about this. Question here is for several people that are listening that may be in a position to invest, you know, they might look at a time like this and say, “OK, is this a time I should be doubling down? Should I do it? Should I wait? Should I hold that money for other uses, depending on a certain time? Where do I begin to think about how to invest that money?” So talk us through more of the opportunistic side of if I have money to invest, is this a period where I want to make that move?

Tim Baker: Yeah. And again, it depends, Tim, again. I’ll say that again and again. You know, if we look at your balance sheet and you have that emergency fund that’s fully plussed up, your consumer debt is in line so you’re not really — you don’t have any credit card debt or you’re not paying that couch off that you bought a year ago when you moved into your house, you know, and you feel pretty secure, as secure as you can be, now might be a good opportunity to start increasing that 401k contribution, that 403b contribution. If you haven’t dabbled in IRAs, you can open up IRAs to basically supplement that. But you know, right now, I think because of what we’re seeing, my inclination for — in a lot of ways is to kind of sit on the cash and put it in a high-yield account, get your 1.5% interest rate now and call it a day. But you know, me personally, I have shoveled some money into the IRAs as I can, just to get that money into the market and working. But I also feel fairly confident in kind of cash position and where we’re at. So yeah, I think it depends on a lot of factors like if you’re a one-income, two-income household and just some of those other things. Now, we’ll talk about this in a second, but one of the big things is that between now — really, March 13 to end of September, for federal loans, $0 payments, 0% interest, so one of the big things — and we talk about this on the podcast all the time, if you guys are not familiar with YFP podcast, check us out. But one of the things we talk about is really acting and planning with intent. So one of the things I’m talking about with clients is hey, you have this $800 per month federal loan payment for your Pay As You Earn. Now that’s going away, and if you’re going for a forgiveness play, you know, PSLF, that still counts. The $0 payment still counts for September, all the way up until September. So what can we do with that $800? And it might be to get the emergency fund further plussed up. It could be to pay off a car, credit card debt. It could be to invest. And I think all of those things are on the table. But I think ultimately, what we don’t want to do is just say,”Oh, sweet, there’s an extra $800 into the pot.” We as humans, we see a copious resource and consume it, whether it’s time or money. So really be intentional and call out, OK, this $800 is going to go right into my Ally emergency fund — I like Ally — or some other emergency fund that you have. Or it’s going to go, I’m going to schedule that payment to go right into my IRA I can contribute for 2019 all the way up until July of this year. So lots of different kind of ways to look at it.

Tim Ulbrich: So for those that are looking to invest and have extra money that they want to then utilize this time period to implement that strategy, I would reference you back, all the way back, to November 2018, which seems forever ago, on the podcast. Episodes 072, 073, 074, 075 and 076, we did a month-long series all about investing, including the priority of investing and commonly asked questions around investing. And I think that material would be helpful to make sure you’re strategically making those decisions as you invest those funds. Tim, other question here — we’ll round out this section on investing as we transition to some of the uncertainty around work, and I’d remind people if they have questions about investing, please submit them now — is the time of rainy day fund emergency savings. You know, we normally preach and teach 3-6 months, depends on individual factors, if you have one income, two incomes, how comfortable, are you not with the amount of funds that are available, what are the priorities you’re trying to achieve? So my question here, is this a time period you look at — and you might have alluded to this a little bit already — where you say, “Maybe there is a time period where somebody who normally would be 3, maybe it should look more like 6?” Or somebody who’s normally at 6 months, this should be larger than 6 months. How do you typically advise clients on the rainy day fund during a time period like this?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I mean, a lot of those I think have been set by like the Certified Planning Board and they’ve gone through multiple iterations of downturns in the market and things like that. You know, the danger of having more than 6 months in cash is that your cash position is too much and that you should really have some of that money into the market. Now again, that gets put to the test when you’re out of work and you can’t find employment or that type of thing. So I don’t think systemically, anything really changes. But you know, I look at my own — one of the things that I, we get stuck on sometimes is, you know, I meet with a client and I say, “Hey, your emergency fund needs to be $20,000.” And then you know, they maybe move and buy a new house, maybe they have a kid and like we don’t go back and kind of refresh that.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: And that needs to be refreshed. So you know, basically what I do from the outset is I say, “Hey, this is what a good emergency fund is. This is where I would put it.” And then we build the savings around that. So I’m a big proponent of having like savings built out for things that are kind of more in line with your goals. So the emergency fund anchors that and then we have kind of secondary and tertiary savings goals. So I don’t think it really changes anything systemically, but I also like one of my bias is that for me, like if I was out of a job like this, like I would figure it out. And I don’t care what I have to do, like I would hustle. And part of that’s kind of just the entrepreneur coming out in me. Not everyone has that, you know? So if you’re more conservative with kind of going out and trying to find income streams, which sometimes pharmacists are, then maybe you do for this period of time try to shuttle away more and then when basically things come to more normalcy, then you kind of get back to that 3-6 months. So I think if you have the cash and you can plus up your account a little bit more, that makes sense. But I think as we go, a lot of the questions people are asking is like, how is this going to change society? How is this going to change how we interact with people and our spending habits and things like that? I don’t know if it really will. Maybe it does. I kind of look back at like 9/11, and you know, now we are however many years later, and it’s like ugh, I have to take my shoes off when I fly in an airplane.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: And you know, I was my freshman year at West Point when that happened. And obviously that was a big, big thing in my life just like it was in everyone’s life. But I think that over time, things erode, we forget, and I think there will be a time when we can go to the movies and not feel scared about getting sick or whatever that is. And I think the same is true with our spending, how we save, and all that kind of stuff.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think this is a good time as we’re wrapping up this section talking about rainy day funds, you know, one of the things that I always mention, especially when you have two people that are working through a financial plan together, is I don’t think this is the place to push somebody else.

Tim Baker: No, yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: So really making sure you are having an honest conversation about during uncertainty like this, sometimes it’s not rational, what makes you comfortable? And obviously there has to be a reasonable balance of that as you’re trying to achieve other goals and do other things. You know, as you mentioned, you don’t want to have too much in the cash position. But if you’re splitting hairs between 4 and 5 months and somebody is more comfortable with 5 months or 6 months, like this is the place to defer, you know, as you look at making sure that both spouses, both individuals that are working on this together are comfortable with that. So Drew, at this point, as we wrap up this investing section and talk about COVID-19 and the financial implications as it relates to investing, I want to pause here and address any questions that have come in specific to investing as we move on to the next topic about work uncertainty.

Drew: Sure, thanks, Tim. So we’ll start with the first question here. For those at home who are kind of relying on financial planners to really manage their investments and maybe they’re looking to gain more knowledge and education around this topic, where might you guys recommend that they start to get that education and really start to learn about investing on their own?

Tim Ulbrich: Great question. Tim Baker, do you want to start and then I’ll chime in?

Tim Baker: I mean, I’m biased. I think right here, right? Like this is a good spot. What I tell clients when we go through any part of the financial plan, whether it’s the fundamentals: insurance and benefits, retirement investment, estate, tax credits, negotiation, whatever that is, just to kind of name a few parts of the plans that we cover, I want to educate clients in a way that it’s enough to make you dangerous but not enough to bore you to death. So we probably could release — I mean, you know, what Tim and Tim wrote, “Seven Figure Pharmacist,” is another great tool, resource, to — if you’re a reader, you know, I can probably name off a bunch on my kind of read list that would go onto the Mount Rushmore of investment books to read: “Index Revolution” is one. I don’t know, Tim, what am I missing here?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, great recommendations on books. “MONEY Master the Game” is something that I typically recommend as a book.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: They do a nice job some of the complexities of investing in a very easy to understand way. Obviously, I put a plug in for our comprehensive financial planning services that Your Financial Pharmacist specifically designed for pharmacy professionals. And you can learn more about that at YFPPlanning.com. And we have some exclusive benefits to APhA members. Two other things that jump out to me: One, I mentioned the investing series we did on the podcast back in November 2018. Again, Episodes 072-076. So you can download that on Apple podcasts, Spotify, or wherever you get your podcasts each and every week — sounds like a commercial. And then the last thing for APhA members, since we’re here obviously in that, is that we’ve done — you’ve done — previous webinars I believe Investing 101, Investing 102, that are available recorded. And again, you can access those at pharmacists.com/YFP. So I think a whole lot of resources, probably strategically identifying one or two to get started and not getting overwhelmed. But I think even for those that have a financial planner, you know, whether it’s us or somebody else, I think making sure — this is true of any part of the financial plan — making sure you’re educated and up-to-speed yourself I think just leads to a richer conversation and a greater understanding and you’re asking more questions, typically, when you are more knowledgeable about a topic. So you know, I think sometimes there’s a tendency to say, “Oh, I’ve got my investment guy, right? I’ve got somebody that’s doing this for me.” And I think it’s always helpful to have some of the base knowledge yourself as well. Awesome. Drew, what else?

Drew: Awesome. Thanks, Tim. Next question. Is it risky to put money into a savings account where you don’t have close access to the bank? Also, should you have some money not in the bank in case the market crashes?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, that’s a good question. So the first question I’m guessing they’re referring to like an online bank perhaps is the way I interpret that versus like a local branch that you can walk through the doors. I mean, I don’t know, Tim Baker, how you feel. I don’t necessarily view online banks such as Ally, CIT Bank, others that are out there that have online savings accounts, to me, I don’t like at that any different than me walking through the doors of a Huntington branch here in Columbus. You know, as long as they’re FDI-insured, obviously you’re looking for competitive product and offering. I feel like from a security standpoint and an offering standpoint, I very much view a physical location similar to an online bank. And obviously you and I have both used Ally extensively and are comfortable with that. What are your thoughts on the cash part of it? This has come up before, I think in our webinar last week about is this a time period where you actually want to have physical cash in hand. What are your thoughts on that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so I had a client ask me this, and I’ve been asked this a couple times since this has all been going on. And I can’t see — I have like a strong — you know, I actually had a client talk about it today. You know, it’s like, we’re not Doomsdayers, but should we keep some cash in the house? And I’m like, I don’t know. I feel like the banks, one of the lessons learned from the last crisis, the banks are more robust and stronger than they’ve probably ever been. And at the end of the day, like what the government is trying to do is figure out ways to get money into the hands of the people and really businesses. So I don’t have this overwhelming personal need to have stacks of cash in a safe in my house in Baltimore, Maryland. So you know, and I remember the first time I talked about this with a client, I said, “You know, if there is a run on like ATMs, maybe that could be a thing. But then you could always go to the grocery store and like take out cash when you did.” But the second I said that the last two times, I’ve been to the grocery store. They basically turned that off.

Tim Ulbrich: Turned it off, yep.

Tim Baker: And my thought was like, OK, grocery stores are flush because everyone’s buying toilet paper and everything else. But yeah, so maybe. I think though, it’s like you can do everything electronic these days anyway. So people are like, what if you need cash? I’m like, Venmo or PayPal? They’re like, well my parents are old, they’re older and they haven’t used all that stuff. I don’t know. I just don’t — I personally don’t see it. But again, a lot of this goes back to how you feel. So if it makes you feel better to have $1,000 in the house, then do it. I don’t think there’s anything terribly wrong with it. I feel like growing up, my mom would hide money around the house. I don’t know why, it was just one of her things, you know, just like little nest eggs. So I don’t know.

Tim Ulbrich: I agree with you. And I think unfortunately, right now since we’re all pretty much quarantined for the most part is if I had $1,000 in cash, I ain’t really going anywhere where I can spend that cash right now. You know, most of it at least what we’re doing from grocery and other standpoint, you know, we’re pre-ordering and picking it up and that kind of thing. So good question, thought, but I echo your comments and feelings. I think you’ve also got to ask yourself, how does this make you feel? And how does that sway your decisions?

Tim Baker: Yeah, and another thing I talk to clients about is like, I’ll say something to the effect of like outside the Zombie Apocalypse, the market’s going to go up. And if we have the Zombie Apocalypse, we have such bigger problems than our investment portfolio. And I think the same is true, it’s like if all of a sudden the banks collapse and we can’t get cash, like the cash might be worthless, you know? So there might be more systemic things to worry about. So probably not the right kind of tone of the conversation, but I just, yeah, I think you’re OK with trusting the banks.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and if that happens, you’re not making student loan payments.

Tim Baker: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: A lot of things aren’t getting paid.

Tim Baker: Right, I agree.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s a depressing thought. So Drew, how about one more before we keep the ball rolling and move onto the next section? And then we can also hold some time at the end.

Drew: Sure. Absolutely. And I just wanted to mention, guys, I know we have a lot of questions coming in, a lot of questions around student loan repayment, and so we do have a couple more topics, one of those being student loan repayment. So we will do our best to get to those questions. So I think we’ll just finish up with a comment. We had a comment from someone come in, they said they’re a member of the Pharmacist Stock Club. It’s a great local opportunity for meeting, learning, and idea sharing. So if you’re interested, try to find and join a local club. So I just wanted to follow up to the question we had earlier about kind of getting started in investing and learning about those options. So I thought that was a good comment to add.

Tim Baker: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: For sure.

Tim Ulbrich: Very cool. I love the passion for learning. And whoever submitted that comment, I’d love to hear more from you about what that looks like and how you do it and perhaps we can share with others that may be looking to start something in their own community or even in these times, start something virtually. So let’s transition to the next area, which I would say led the way in those that registered. When we asked the question, you know, what are you most concerned with your financial plan as it relates to COVID-19, there was this bucket around uncertainty of work. And we know certain situations — I would say they’re not very frequent right now from what we can gather — but we know there’s certain situations where folks have reduced hours because of lower senses at the hospital as they’re waiting for the surges to happen into the future. You know, we do know that many might be impacted by whether it’s not necessarily their own cut hours, it could be a spouse, a family member that is being impacted, or somebody that has a business or a side hustle, I think about things like Airbnb income, or it could be somebody that even gets sick with COVID and is unable to work for a period of time. So you know, I think this is an important topic that we spend a little bit of time in. And I want to kick off the discussion here, Tim Baker, for those that are listening and are concerned about either current situations of reduced hours or that that may come in the future or their job is impacted in one way or another, what are some things that they can be thinking about with their financial plan to prepare for that situation? Big question, I know.
Tim Baker: Yeah, so there’s so many different facets to this point. So like, you know, one of the things and really the ink is still drying, so maybe I’ll talk more about the CARES Act that President Trump signed into law last Friday. So real quick, the CARES Act stands for the Coronavirus Aid Relief and Economic Securities Act that was passed by the Senate, then the House, then signed into law by Trump last Friday. We’re still basically reading and deciphering like what is actually included in here and how it’s all going to work. But really, it’s a $2 trillion emergency fiscal stimulus package, which is aimed to ease the effects of kind of the economic damage that that this is really causing. This is the largest economic stimulus package in U.S. history, actually it’s more like $6 trillion when you factor in like loan provisions and guarantees that the U.S. government is making. A good part of this, about half a trillion, $500 billion, is for stimulus checks, could be more for — $500 billion for severely damaged industries, $400 for wages and payroll tax relief and on and on. So I think the biggest thing that I would probably do if I was concerned or if I was furloughed or something like that is actually file for unemployment. So we did see a big spike, probably the largest spike I think ever, 3.3 million people filed for unemployment between March 15 and March 21. That was the biggest I think spike in history. But a lot of people, they’re like, ah, there’s maybe a stigma side. It doesn’t matter. At the end of the day, we’ve got to pay the bills. You pay into it as a taxpayer, so this is a benefit for the purposes of that is to actually file for unemployment. And what the CARES Act does is actually has expanded that in terms of what you potentially get from an unemployment perspective. Another thing to do is actually take stock, look at your balance sheet. So obviously we’ve been talking about the power of the emergency fund and being able to look at OK, what is your burn rate? How many months can you basically get by without any income? And then if we supplement this with some of the other incomes out there, how do we do this? But one of the big things that you now have access to that you didn’t have access to before were things like your retirement plans, IRAs, 401k’s, 403b’s. You can actually take distributions up to $100,000 in 2020. You have to take the distribution in 2020 from these IRAs and employer-sponsored plans, without penalty. So as long as you’ve been affected by the coronavirus — and this is a very broad interpretation — you either have to be diagnosed, have a spouse or dependent diagnosed, you’ve experienced adverse financial consequences as a result, you’re unable to work because you can’t get daycare, you own your own business and it had to close, very, very broad. You basically are exempt from the 10% penalty. So most people know that once you put money into an IRA, a 401k, once it hits that bucket, for you to get it out, it’s a 10% penalty to get those moneys out. That goes away. A lot of times, you had to withhold if you were taking money out of or rolling over a 401k, you had to withhold 20%. And the reason that they do this is people take that money out, and it’s recognized as income. And then when the tax bill comes due, they’re like, oh, I forgot that I have a $50,000 tax bill or a $20,000 tax bill. The withholding goes away. And you can actually — you can repay this back. So you could say, “Hey, I need this $100,000 today for 2020,” and then over the next three years, you can pay it back or not without penalty. So that’s another thing that you can do. The other thing that they also did is they enhanced 401k. So most 401k’s, 403b’s, have provisions for you to take money and basically for hardships. So they’ve kind of done some broad strokes here. So typically, the maximum that you can take from a 401k was $50,000. Now they doubled that to $100,000.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: Basically, it used to be that you could only take 50% of the vested balance. So if I had a $40,000 401k, I could only take $20,000 of that. Now it’s basically you can take 100% of what’s vested. So if I have $40,000, I could take all $40,000 up to a maximum of $100,000. And then the big thing here is when you take money from the 401k, you typically pay that back as part of your paycheck with an interest payment. All of this, all of those payments will be delayed for at least up to a year. So those assets on your balance sheet, when you’re looking at OK, how do I get through this? You do have some levers to pull. And obviously some of the things that we always talk about is the emergency fund, you could always basically put in your — or take out what you put into a Roth, that comes out without penalty. You know, I think the big thing that I always talk about is diversifying your income streams.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: So you know, I think we as Americans, just people, we say, “OK, this is our paycheck,” and we self-cap our income. But especially now, and I often wonder like to me, the things I’m really interested coming out of the coronavirus is what are all the things that we see as problems or we’re just sitting around and like here’s a solution.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: So it could be where a business idea is born out — typically, that takes a lot of ramp-up, so maybe it’s not now. But you know, big things like could you deliver for Amazon? I would do it in a second. I love to drive around, listen to stuff, that would be fine by me. Some people are like nope, don’t want to do that, I want to stay quarantined. But thinking of ways to diversify income is big. And then probably just do a bottom-up approach to your budget. Really look at that. You know, obviously, growing top-line income I think can have far ramifications. But looking at your budget and say, “OK, do I really need” — like my wife and I, we do cleaners once a month. They’re not coming to our house because they don’t want to get infected. So that’s out of the budget. But things like that that you can basically say, OK, is this something that I absolutely need to have? You can wipe out your student loan payment. A lot of banks are forgoing mortgages, so you can contact your bank and say, “Hey, coronavirus, no loan payment for the foreseeable future.” So there’s lots of different things like that that I think are big to kind of get us through this tough period. Tim, did I leave anything else out?

Tim Ulbrich: No, that’s really comprehensive. And I’m glad you talked about all the different levers you can pull. And I’m glad you started with unemployment claims because I think there is a stigma. I know it’s something I would struggle with. But I think we have to remember that this was passed for this specific reason. So if we have somebody on the call tonight who is having a financial hardship, has reduced hours, has lost their job, has been furloughed, whatever be the case, I think starting there — because the way I think about this is of all the things you talked about, in what order am I going to pull the levers, right? So the way I think I would think about this is if I can file for unemployment and because of the CARES Act, we see that there’s some extra provisions there with additional benefits from the state and it’s a longer time period, things like that, but if I can then know what I’m looking at in terms of unemployment and then rework my budget, then I kind of know what else do I need to do. Do I need to pull from the emergency fund? Do I need to put the mortgage payment on pause? I don’t have to worry about the student loan payment. Do I need to pull money from a 401k or a 403b or an IRA? But I think objectively, starting with what can you get in terms of replacing income? And then working backwards and identifying what other moves you can make to help in that. So Tim, talk us through — and you might have mentioned this. I just want to make sure that those are on — those that are on are tracking with me as well. If I were to pull or need to pull let’s say $40,000 from my 401k or 403b, you mentioned that that has to be in this year, 2020. Obviously, those are pre-tax contributions. So is that then I would assume just treated as taxable income this year? Can I spread it out? And how should I also be thinking about the tax implications of that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so one of the kind weird things or odd things about this but actually interesting is that you know, let’s take it the round number of $90,000 as an example. So if you can — say you take $90,000 out of your 401k. Now, you don’t get the 10% penalty, which is awesome. You get that cash immediately. So you don’t have to withhold anything. And then you have the eligibility repaid over three years if you want or not. But basically, you can recognize that income either all the $90,000 that you take out in 2020. So let’s pretend that I’m a service worker, and I make $30,000 this year. And I take $90,000 out. Now, I can basically recognize — so I basically am taxed on the $120,000 for 2020. Or I can basically spread out that adjustment between — or that distribution — across three years. So I could take $30,000 in 2020, $30,000 in 2021 and $30,000 in 2022. Now, this is where working with a savvy tax professional like our Paul Eichenberg might help this. But it’s either one or the other. So you can’t like — it’s either like spread it out evenly for three years, which probably more often than not, that makes the most sense if you can defer it out. Or if it’s a really bad year and you want to basically hey, maybe it’s $40,000 that you need, it makes sense to take it all in 2020 because you know, basically you’re shut down, you’re not making any income. Maybe it makes sense to do that. So it just depends on how you elected to do that. Another point about the unemployment that I will say is, you know, again, I kind of think about it kind of like social security. Like you pay into that over the course of your life. Same thing with unemployment. You pay into that. Some of the things that they did with the CARES Act is that the waiting period goes away. So before, you had to typically wait.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: Basically the federal government will cover the first week of unemployment. There’s a fund called the Pandemic Unemployment Insurance, which is typically if you don’t qualify for anything else, it’s typically for self-employed individuals or contractors. That’s available for you. They’ve actually plussed up — so like the regular state unemployment benefit is increased by $600 per week. Just to give you some context, the average, the typical unemployment check, is $385 per week.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, it was big news.

Tim Baker: Yeah. So it’s now like more than double the bonus on top of that. And you get this — and this was probably one of the big things that tied it up in the Congress.

Tim Ulbrich: Senate.

Tim Baker: The Senate, was because they thought that the benefit was too generous where it would disincentivize people from basically going out and looking for work. But they capped it at basically four months. But the extension of the overall benefits go 13 extra weeks. So again, you know, this is — right now, we’re in a time where like we’re cooped up, you know, maybe we’re feeling a little blue, maybe this half of unemployment, this shouldn’t — this doesn’t define you. This is not part of who you are.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Tim Baker: And even like businesses, we’re going to see businesses that are not going to be able to survive this. And it’s a shame because it’s not something that they necessarily did wrong. It’s just a systemic thing that came along, and I think the government is trying to do whatever they can to basically keep businesses afloat and keep people on payrolls and things like that. But this is not a poor reflection of you and what you’re doing. So I just want to make that point because that’s a real thing for sure.

Tim Ulbrich: Great reminder. And I think this is also a good time to remind you, we talk about things like the CARES Act, and we’ll talk about the student loans here in a moment. Here you’re talking about unemployment and the additional $600 a week benefit and the timeline of that being up to four months. I think this is a good time to remind that you know, some of this may be extended. Time will tell. We don’t know. So what we know right now is what’s been passed. But I think we will continue to keep an eye out for discussions. There’s already discussions of a fourth stimulus type of package that is in the works that I was reading about this morning. So I think stay tuned. And if you’re not already part of the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group, I hope you’ll join us as we’re trying to stay as up-to-date as we can on all of this information. So before we jump into student loans, Tim, I thought it would helpful since we talked about unemployment and the CARES Act extensively, let’s talk for a moment about the stimulus checks. Who’s getting them? Who’s not? Timeline? And what can people expect here? Because I think we’re going to have some people listening, many people perhaps, that won’t get these or will get a reduced amount. So I don’t want to spend a ton of time here, and this has probably gotten the most wide press compared to some of the other items. But let’s talk for a moment here before we take some questions and then transition into student loans.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so this is Section 2201, the recovery rebates to individuals. Now, the stats out there is that 90% of taxpayers should receive something. I’m not sure what percent or pharmacists will receive this, but essentially this is a credit against 2020 income taxes. So everyone basically has a starting amount and then it gets reduced based on your AGI, you Adjusted Gross Income. So what we use — so as broad strokes, basically it’s $1,200 for each individual or $2,400 for married couples and then $500 per child essentially under 17. So if they’re 17, they don’t get it. Basically, under 17. The phase-outs for this are basically if you’re married filing jointly, it’s $150,000. And then head of household is $112,500 AGI. And then all other filers is $75,000. So basically, the way that you calculate this is if you’re a single taxpayer and you have one kid, that’s $1,200 plus $500 for the child. So that’s a $1,700 refundable credit. If you’re a married couple with one child, you basically have $2,400 plus $500 is the $2,900. Now, you take that as the starting point and then you look at your AGI. So in that first example, if you made $65,000 as a single individual, then you would get 100% of that $1,700.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: If you made $76,000, which is $1,000 above the threshold, then your benefit would be reduced by I think it’s $50 for every $1,000. So in that case, it would be not $1,700. It would be $1,650.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: So the same thing with the married filing jointly, one kid, $2,400 for the couple, $500 for the child, that’s $2,900. If they made basically $151,000, it would basically be reduced by $50. So $2,850 instead of the $2,900. So you start with basically the family situation, then you apply the income, and then you reduce it as such. So for a lot of pharmacists, you know — and again, so the other caveat to this is they’re going to look at the last tax return on file. So if you are not a procrastinator or you filed your taxes early, good for you. They’re going to look at your 2019 return. If you haven’t filed your taxes or you’re like, hey, extension, more time to use, then they’re going to look at 2018. Now, at the end of the day, it will be basically be chewed up on the 2020 tax return. So they’re not going to claw anything back. So let’s pretend that your 2018-2019 income is lower than what it is today, you still get that rebate and they’re not going to claw that back. But let’s pretend that your 2018-2019 income is higher and you get furloughed, you might not get it today. And I would estimate checks will start coming — checks are deposited and will start coming in May. You might get it today, but you could get it when you file your 2020 taxes. Now, does that help you? No. It doesn’t necessarily help you today. But the idea is that in future tax returns, you’ll be indemnified essentially to that, to what you’re — so here’s an example. I’m not going to file my 2019 taxes anytime soon because of a lot of the changes that I had in my household, the business, that type of thing. So our son Liam was born last year. So he’s — to the IRS, he doesn’t really exist right now. So when we go to file for 2020, I expect a $500 credit for him.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: So that’s an example. Now, there are some maybe thoughts about the ethics of this in terms of like, hey, should I file my 2019 because it will give me a better credit? The answer is yes. You should. Or should I wait to file? The answer is yes. That’s just good financial planning, it’s good sense. At the end of the day, this is tax money that they’re basically returning to you. So to me, you know, regardless of where you’re at, whether you are in a position where income is fine and stable, we don’t know that in the future. So to me is this is the system that’s there. It’s just like with taxes, what we say is we want to pay the least amount of taxes humanly possible. That’s legally. That’s legally possible. So we’re not going to pay more than that. So the same thing is that if you can get a better benefit, then you should go for that for sure.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and we’re talking about legal tax strategies. So let’s be very clear on that.

Tim Baker: Exactly.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think that’s an important point. So Tim Baker, when you’re throwing around terms like clawback, you’re not using pharmacy lingo like PBM clawbacks and other things.

Tim Baker: Yeah, sorry.

Tim Ulbrich: There will be no clawbacks here though, just to be clear.

Tim Baker: No clawbacks.

Tim Ulbrich: For those who are used to clawbacks. So Drew, let’s stop here and take a couple questions related to work uncertainty before we move onto student loans.

Drew: Sure, Tim. First question, will this Act allow for small business owners to file for unemployment when they typically would not qualify?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so that — exactly right. So typically as a small business owner, you don’t get into that party. But the Pandemic fund that I mentioned is typically going to be for those small business owners, those contractors, that wouldn’t otherwise qualify. So that’s the fund that they’re probably going to basically dip into. It’s called the Pandemic Unemployment Insurance program. It’s a federal program. And that’s, to me, that’s where I would definitely go.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I was thinking today, Tim Baker, about all of the people that — we talk about on the podcast all the time about side hustling, you know, whether it’s Airbnb, Rover, the list goes on and on. And how many of those are being impacted in a time like this? So it’s certainly something to consider. What else, Drew?

Drew: Thanks, guys. Another interesting question from an independent pharmacy owner. Do you guys have more insight into any assistance that may come in the future? For example, if their business is doing well right now, they’re showing an increase in revenue over the last few weeks. However, they could foresee a slump in the coming months, for example, if they’ve had patients who filled refills early or for 90 days. So therefore, they may need assistance in the future. What do you guys think about that?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so actually, one of the changes in the bill — so there are some healthcare-related rules, and I’ll run through those really quickly. So there’s definition of medical expenses is expanded, specifically for HSAs and FSAs. So a lot of eligible medical expenses will now include over-the-counter meds. So that’s a big one. But one of the things that they talked about too is Part D recipients can request up to a 90-day supply. And it’s just a matter of kind of limiting seniors from basically having to go out and those type of things. Telehealth is another big thing that’s been temporary covered by HSA-eligible high-deductible plans. So as part of that, though, to go back to the kind of independent side, one of the major parts of this legislation, the CARES Act is the Paycheck Protection Program, which is essentially — it looks like free money in a lot of ways. So if you are a pharmacy owner out there and you’re like, hey, things are OK now but we could be affected — and actually, Tim, I don’t know if you saw this email. But you know, our bank, our business bank, actually sent us kind of an email about this that said, “Hey, you may be eligible. Check this out.”

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Tim Baker: And it basically outlined a lot of the big — so it’s basically, it’s guaranteed by the Small Business Administration and issued by SBA-approved lenders. You’ve got to apply for this type of loan by June 3. And the maximum duration of the loan is 10 years. So this is typically for a business that has less than 500 employees. You do have to basically in good faith certify that the loan is necessary due to uncertainty of current economic conditions caused by the coronavirus. Now that’s again a broad definition there. And I would say like if you are in the toilet paper or the hand sanitizer business, you should not be applying for this because that would be fraud. But the interesting part of this is that the max loan is the lesser of $10 million, or 2.5 times the average monthly payroll costs of the previous year. And the proceeds can be used for payroll, group health insurance premiums, salaries, rent, utilities. And 100% of that could be forgiven if it’s used during the first 8 weeks that you get the loan.

Tim Ulbrich: Which is crazy.

Tim Baker: And you don’t lay off employees. So you have to basically kind of have the same employees, you have to pay them more or less the same amount, but it’s pretty generous. And the rates for small business rates are typically higher. The rates, the maximum that you can be charged is 4%. The discharge debt is nontaxable. And those initial payments are going to be deferred for at least 6 if not 12 months. So I have an independent pharmacy owner that I was talking to earlier this week and he’s like, “Is this for life?” And I’m like, “I think so. But let me read up more about it.” Because potentially, again, it’s one of those things that’s uncertainty about this. And there’s a lot of businesses that you could probably chalk that up to now go apply for these loans, I think it’s a pain in the neck. So it’s something to consider though.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and get your pen ready I think to do the paperwork. But speaking of toilet paper companies, Tim Baker, I saw a toilet paper startup company I was reading about this morning that I thought was interesting. But I think on a serious note — and we actually were having this conversation before we jumped on this evening — I would encourage whoever asked that question or others that might be this would be impacting is to try to really, really intentionally self-assess, even if you’re not, again, at a good faith statement, even if you’re not impacted today, you know, as you look out in the future and trends and how that business will change, could you be heading in that direction where challenges may present themselves, payroll might be an issue. Or if you’re thinking ahead to the business, you know, that changes hiring or how you’re leveraging resources, I think really taking a step back to say, of course you want to be in good faith, but if there’s not impacts that are happening today that are significant, is that something that could be coming in the future if this continues? So Drew, how about one more and then we’ll transition to student loans.

Drew: Sure, guys. So if someone was unemployed before the CARES Act was passed, could they still have the increase to $600 a week?

Tim Ulbrich: I don’t know that question. My gut would assume yes, they would, but I don’t know the answer to that. Do you, Tim?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I think yes. And again, part of this is just if you think about the administration of this to say like, you know, when — I’m pretty sure that — well, maybe it depends. I’m not going to say yes or no to that. That might be something we have to look at. So if you were unemployed before this was signed into law, how does that affect your unemployment? Let me try to find some answers to that. If that person could email us at [email protected], I’ll research and get back to you. That’s a good question.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I would like to think — maybe it’s half glass full — I’d like to think that they wouldn’t penalize somebody because of the timing of that.

Tim Baker: But I do know they were making a big deal about the actual date in which he signs. So it could basically be dated. That’s kind of the line, the demarkation.

Tim Ulbrich: That makes sense.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: OK. Alright, let’s move to student loans, probably a lot to discuss here and it sounds like from Drew’s comment earlier, we have a lot of questions. So we talked a little bit about the CARES Act and student loans, but let’s dig in in more detail, Tim. You know, as I mentioned in the introduction, we had a lot of news around student loans, starting with the 60-day interest freeze to the 60-day no payment with the interest freeze and then obviously the big news that came as part of the CARES Act of no payments for six months with no interest that will accrue during that time. And that was really I think the big news on student loans. So talk to us a little bit about that news as well as what that means for people that are pursuing loan forgiveness and then which federal loans are included and what’s not included.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so you know, the big news obviously, like you said, is that for federal student loan payments — so we’re not talking about your private refi’s. And this is really direct loans, so we’re not even really talking about FFEL loans or even Perkins loans or things like that.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s right.

Tim Baker: We’re really talking about the direct loans that are out there. Automatically, you’re going to basically pay 0% interest effective March 13 to September 20 of this year. And then also, payments will be suspended automatically over the course of the time. Now, we’re still talking to clients and people that are saying like, hey, they’re not suspended. Student loan servicers, one, I think part of the — I’ll give them a little bit of grace because I think they’re understaffed right now because of everything that’s going on but also they’re just — they are notoriously poor at answering questions, responding to borrowers and that type of thing. So it could take a little bit of time for them to kind of get everything on board. But I looked at the FedLoan page as one of the big federal loan servicers, and they said if there is any delay, everything will be retroactively counted and things like that. So you know, typically the big ones are FedLoan, Navient, NelNet, Great Lakes, those are all federal loan providers. So required payments are suspended. And you don’t really have to do anything. And probably it’s better if you don’t do anything because I guarantee you if one person calls and they get one direction and then the next, you could call five minutes later and get a completely separate, different direction. So the big takeaway here is that, you know, from a federal student loan perspective, no interest, no payments until basically September 30. So I think the big thing is depending on where you’re at is to kind of look at, OK, as an example, I have an $800 payment. In most cases, you should not be paying that. We should be directing that elsewhere, which could be looking at plussing up the emergency fund a little bit more, paying down consumer debt or other high-interest debt, it could be invested. So be very, very intentional about how you want to direct that payment. Again, typically if we’re not, we see lifestyle creep and things like that. That $800 gets lost in the fold. So we want to make sure that we’re really intentional with that. Another big thing is that involuntarily debt collections will be basically put on hold and suspended. So if we have anybody out there that’s kind of in those dire straits, you’d have a little bit of reprieve there. If you’re in school, if we have students on here, I think the big thing that’s going to be different is basically you’re going to take all of your unsubsidized loans and they’re going to subsidized. So essentially for those months, you’ll basically not accrue any interest, which is a big deal because that bill is basically tacked on daily. I’m trying to think — now for, I mentioned for federal loans or for private loans and FFEL loans, you kind of got cut out of this deal. So this is one of the things that’s very unfortunate because typically the people that are trying to refinance are really trying to take a proactive approach to paying off their loans. So in the decision tree, it’s typically hey, is forgiveness on the table, whether it’s PSLF or non-PSLF. If it’s not, you’re like, “Hey, Tim, not cool. Don’t trust the federal or the forgiveness program,” which I think is a viable program, you then go to comparing your standard payment to a refi. And typically, refi rates have been so much better than what you get coming out of school, so it makes sense to basically shift over from the federal government to the private. Now you’re basically being penalized for taking a more proactive approach to paying off your loans whereas a forgiveness option or forgiveness play is more of a reactive approach, unfortunately. So you can consolidate loans. I think that if you consolidate them down, a FFEL loan, so this is federal loans that aren’t part of this, you can consolidate a FFEL or even a Perkins loan down and potentially get some type of reprieve on that. Typically when you do that, if you are looking at a forgiveness option — actually, you probably want to not look at that unless you can pick out those loans specifically. That can be a big problem. I think those are the main talking points.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, just to reiterate some of the things you mentioned. I think this is huge news, especially for those that may be hearing this for the first, second or even third time I mean, for that matter. No payments on qualifying federal loans until September 30. Again, who knows? This may or may not be extended. Time will tell. No interest that accrues during the interim. And this will count towards loan forgiveness. So for the client you mentioned earlier that has two months left of PSLF, they’re getting a free ride on the last two payments, huh?

Tim Baker: Well, I told her, I was like, I think that you paid your last student loan payment. And she had the biggest smile ever.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s awesome. That’s really cool.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: So if somebody does make a payment — and I’m grateful for what you said about really taking a step back and being strategic — obviously would then just go toward directly to the principal, right?

Tim Baker: Yes, correct. Now, according to like FedLoan, they would basically figure out a way to like make you hold so you get that full benefit. I have no idea, and I have very little confidence that will actually happen, so I think one of the questions is, how do I know that if my payments count toward PSLF, I would be tracking them because one of the — although I’ve said it time and time again, I think PSLF is a very viable strategy and I think it does have legs despite the kind of national news about it, you can’t argue with the math. But the administration of this is awful, in my opinion. The Department of Education is supposed to be basically providing oversight for FedLoan, and you know, by and large, they bumbled that program. So there’s lots of handholding, there’s lots of uncertainty around it, but at the end of the day, you have to basically cross your t’s and dot your i’s, just make sure that you’re babysitting them, so to speak. So you know, I think running — one of the things you could potentially do is run an NSLDS report, which is just basically the text document that basically shows the birth to the death of the loan. So basically a month-by-month description. So run that kind of now and then run it afterwards and kind of just see where you’re at in terms of your overall PSLF count. I think that’s what I would do.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, this will as we get through this storm and we talk about PSLF in the future, I think this will be another example point just like last year when they added some funding to the program to help make up for some borrowers that ran into issues, especially those first couple years of applying for forgiveness. I think this will be another tick in the column of you know, it looks pretty good for the longevity of PSLF or the grandfathering of borrowers that are currently there. So does this — Tim, my question is, you know, for those that are or were thinking about refinance, does this effectively make refinance a moot point for this six-month period?

Tim Baker: Yeah, I mean, I guess there could be certain like instances where you can — because I think one of the things that I am kind of concerned about is some of these companies that are offering refi can’t stay solvent because eventually, effectively, you wiped away a lot of their market because of the 0%. So there’s going to be a lot less people jumping from the federal to the private. Now, I guess you could have some people that go from a private to a private refi.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Tim Baker: So it’s like hey, I have this 5%, I can get a 3.25%. That’s a little bit better. But I think it’s like 90% — isn’t it like 90% of loans are federal loans or something else?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and we’ve seen that tick up in rates.

Tim Baker: Yeah. Yeah, so the rates — that’s the other thing. Rates have gone up. So and they’ve been yo-yoing. I wouldn’t be surprised if they went back down.

Tim Ulbrich: Agreed.

Tim Baker: So you know, if I could get in, I would probably have to be somewhat through the benefit period. But if I’m 3-4 months in and I can get a rate that’s really, really aggressive, you know, maybe like 2%, I might consider that as an option just to kind of lock that in. But yeah, I mean, I think it really doesn’t make a whole lot of sense to leave that, to leave the federal system. And I think the other thing to kind of note is the federal loans, they are more generous when it comes to like hardships and things like that because they’re backed by the full faith and credit of the U.S. taxpayer where some of these other companies are not. They don’t have that bank account standing behind them. So they can’t be as generous with them. Now, a lot of them have matched a lot of the kind of the forgiveness upon death and disability and they will work with you on a hardship. And I would say if you do have private loans and you can’t make the payments, contact the Earnest, CommonBond, Credible, whoever it is, and say, “What can we do?” And a lot of times, they will work with you. But they’re also, they’re kind of in dire straits as well. So.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And you know, we talk a lot about on the podcast and the blog on the pros and cons of refinance. So I’m going to have to update my slides in the future, you know, something we could have never predicted, but a COVID-19-like situation where you have something like six months of federal loan payments being paused and 0% interest. I could not have ever predicted this happening. So — and just to add on your comment, Tim, before we take questions, I think it’s a really important reminder that we certainly want to extend them some grace in this moment where they’re dealing with a lot as well, but the loan servicing companies — we even have an example today from one of our Certified Financial Planners, Robert Lopez, who was on the phone with them and I think in his words was really after being on hold, was less than helpful in their response. And I think that can happen in terms of incorrect information or they’re overwhelmed. And we’ve heard that before. This is not the first time. So making sure that what you hear is lining up with other things you’ve heard or if you think, you know, that doesn’t right, making sure you’re fact-checking that.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and the thing that he said to me when I talked to him about it was like, yeah, and she was just very, very confident in her answer but completely wrong, which is — that’s the problem because it’s not like the student loans are a black-and-white issue. There’s lots of nuance and intricacies and when you’re calling up someone on such a big thing, we’re talking potentially six figures of debt, you want to walk away like feeling confident that the advice or the counsel that that person on the other line gave you was sound. And more often than not, it’s just not. And it’s not necessarily the fault of the person, it’s just that they’re not trained very well. And that’s a shame because I think we’re seeing — you know, and that’s one of the bad publicity angles is like hey, I was told this and it was completely something different, you know?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: So that’s why I think sometimes working with someone to help cross t’s and dot i’s and get you to that finish line is really, really important because there’s just a lot of potential hoops to jump through. And it’s not just — you know, there’s so many different — even like the tax ramifications with student loans, that’s one of the reasons that we started doing taxes at YFP is like I was tired of basically referring people out to professionals that had no idea how to handle the taxes. So I’m like, we have to do it in-house. And that’s what we do.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Great stuff, Tim Baker, as always. So Drew, you had mentioned earlier lots of questions around student loans, so let’s tackle a handful of those.

Drew: Alright. So the first question, would you consider reconsolidating federal loans for a low rate? Or wait until after September? What if this rate is only offered over the next month?

Tim Baker: So I think we’re kind of conflating two issues if I’m using that word correctly. So consolidation or reconsolidation and refinance are completely separate things. So when you consolidate, when you consolidate your loans, you’re basically taking two or more federal loans, so think Direct Plus, Direct Unsubsidized, Direct Stafford Subsidized, and you’re basically shrinking those down into really one or two loans, more than likely two. You have a Direct Consolidation Unsubsidized loan, and a Direct Consolidation Subsidized loan. The reason that you do consolidation is two reasons: One is for convenience. So you guys know as pharmacists, you have a crapton of loans that are pages long. If you look at your credit report, it’s a mess because every basically disbursement is a record in your credit report. So you do it kind of for ease of use, for convenience. The second reason that you do it is to kind of solve the square peg, round hole. So like we mentioned, some of those FFEL loans and some of those other loans that are out there that a little bit older, they don’t qualify for some of those income-driven plans that are out there that then allow you to be forgiven, to get into some of the forgiveness programs. So it’s basically consolidate those down and then get into those IBR, ICR, PAYE or in a Revised Pay As You Earn. Now, the key here is that you’re just taking a weighted balance in interest rate. So you’re not getting any better terms or deals or anything like that. So if you had, you know, 6% and 5% and 4%, they’d just weight those together and now your new rate is 5.4% as an example. So when you — so that’s consolidation. When you refinance, you’re basically saying, deuces, federal government. Thanks for lending me the money, but I’m going to take my income, my credit score, my payment history, and I’m going to go out to the Credibles of the world, some of these other companies, and I’m going to try to find a better deal, a better terms for myself. So you know, I use kind of 6% as the line of demarkation. So anything higher than 6% on your federal loans is typically high. Anything low is typically — lower than that is typically pretty good. But if you have an average weighted interest rate of 5.8%, at a 10-year, that’s your default, a 10-year standard repayment, you can even today with the rates that are out there, you can beat 5.8%, so that’s where you would do an apples-to-apples comparison to a 10-year with a Credible or a CommonBond or something like that. You might get 4.9%. I’m just making up rates right now. So you would say, OK, better terms, lower payment, that type of thing. So to answer your question, do I think — so those are really the big differences. Now, the big thing to remember is that once you go from the federal to the private, there’s no going back. So that’s why a lot — I was kind of bemoaning the fact that people that have made that decision to say, “Thanks, federal government, it’s been real. Thanks for loaning me the money, I’m going to take it from here and go to a private company,” they’re kind of left in the dark a little bit because there’s no relief for them. So and they can’t go back. So they can’t say, “Psych. Just kidding. Takebacksies, let me go back to the federal government and get my relief.” So with regard to the rates, you know, rates are a little bit higher than they were a couple weeks ago. I would imagine that they’re going to come down. I think they’re going to have to just to be somewhat competitive with the government. But what the loan companies now are struggling with is not the fact that the fed has lower rates. It’s more about if I, Tim Ulbrich, if I let you refinance and now you’re making payments to me, the Baker Private Refi company, can I trust that you’re actually going to be employed to pay this back? And by the way, like I don’t have a huge cash reserve like the federal government that I can just rely on. So that’s why there was such a big flood of refis and these companies were like, whoa, like this is a problem and rates started to creep back up. And I think they’ll have to go back down just to incentivize, especially towards the end of that period, that September grace period, relief period, but yeah. So those are big, big differences we’re talking about. And sometimes those are used interchangeably, and they shouldn’t be. But a very common issue.

Drew: Awesome, guys. Should the student loan payments continue and just go 100% toward principal on the student loans during this time? Are federal Grad PLUS loans included?

Tim Baker: So the answer to the second question is yes. Grad PLUS loans are included. The answer to the first question is, typically no. So most of the time, if you are basically going through this strategy — if you selected your strategy appropriately, we’ll say, if you are in the federal system today, it’s really — the main reason is because you’re trying to seek some type of forgiveness option. So in that case, in that case, you should not pay a dollar more than you need to. The flag that you need to fly is you want to pay the least amount as humanly to maximize your forgiveness. So you’re going to take full advantage of that payment that would otherwise go there and basically direct that elsewhere.

Tim Ulbrich: And you get your forgiveness credit.

Tim Baker: Correct. Yeah, and get that month counted. Anytime that you can have basically a $0 payment, like a $0 interest payment, the math says basically money is a finite resource, use that money elsewhere. Now, this is kind of an emotional thing. Now, so the reason that I say most people that are in a federal payment is typically because they’re seeking forgiveness. You could be looking at me and saying, “Well, I’m in the federal program and I’m not seeking forgiveness.” So the reason I say that is because it makes sense from a math perspective to go outside — because of where rates have been for the last however many years — it makes sense to go out to a private company and get a better rate. Now, 10 years ago, a lot of these companies — like the student loan refi game was newer and when I was taught about student loans, you would never leave the federal system because the federal system, there’s a lot of these protections, forgive upon death and disability. But because of students loans are a $1.5 trillion issue, a lot of these companies have kind of risen to the same benefits that the federal government has. So now they can incentivize you to say, “Come over here and pay us the interest over the federal government.” So the question is should I pay the money back? I would say no unless your goal is to basically pay them off as quickly as possible. And if that’s true, then you probably should have refinanced years ago anyway. If that’s still true and you’re still in the federal system, I would say, yeah, you can pay it off. I would probably still direct that money elsewhere and then probably refinance because more than often, more often than not, you can get a better rate. Now, there are sometimes I come across loans that are like 2% and 3%. You know, if you are one of those people, don’t listen to me because I think you’re in the right spot. So if you are in a 2% or 3%, oftentimes, again, you’re like, alright, well I’d rather pay off my car loan that’s 5% or that credit card that I have that’s whatever percent. So those are some of the things you just have to weigh.

Tim Ulbrich: And if I could add to that, Tim, I think the only exception I think of here is if somebody knows themselves well enough that that money is going to be diverted elsewhere through kind of the typical lifestyle creep thing. If you know yourself well enough and you have that self-awareness, I think that might be the exception where you say, I’m going to keep making payments because momentum is really important. But the way I think about this is let’s say I’m making $1,500 a month payment let’s say on the standard default federal system. I think about that. If I didn’t have to make that payment, how would I best leverage $1,500 a month across my financial plan? And this is where we go back and we talk about this all the time on the podcast. So not just looking at one segment of your financial plan. So what does your emergency fund look like? What does the consumer debt look like? What investment opportunities exist? Are you not taking advantage of employer match in retirement, that type of situation? So you know, if you look at all those, more often than not I think what you’re really referring to is more often than not, if not almost always, you’re probably going to find an opportunity where that money could be leveraged elsewhere, at least for the short term when you have this 0% interest for six months.

Tim Baker: Yeah, and I’ll give you an example. I was talking to a pharmacist in Washington. He’s married. He’s going for PSLF. I forget how much he’s paying per month. But he has a little ways to go with the emergency fund. He has a car — one of his car loans is 5-6%. So his question is, should I put money into the emergency fund? I’m like, yes, and probably focus on the car loan. And you know, if you think about it, these loan payments can be 8 — and especially if you’re married — it can be thousands and thousands of dollars. I mean, one, two, three months of that can go huge right into an emergency fund. Like I think about how much money my wife and I basically save into our Ally accounts for different purposes. You know, it’s about $1,500 a month after we’re putting money into 401ks and IRAs and things like that, 529 accounts for our kids. But you know, it’s going into our Mexico fund or it’s going into our home maintenance fund or whatever that looks like. But if I could basically double that for this amount of months, like that would be awesome. And then the other side of that is once you have your savings plan in place, that’s when you can really get dangerous with your investments. And sometimes we put the cart before the horse. So I work with a lot of pharmacists that are like credit card debt, student loan payments are kind of all over the place, and then they have like a Robinhood account. And I get — I know why we do that. It’s because we’re interested and we want to learn about investments, but those are — we’re three or four steps ahead where we probably shouldn’t be directing money into a taxable account. We should be focused on some of these steps 1-8 type of thing. So.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. So Drew, I think we have time for probably one more question before we wrap up for the evening.

Drew: Awesome. So guys, for future borrowers of federal loans, do you think the interest rate will be higher after COVID-19 to make up for money lost?

Tim Ulbrich: Ooh, that’s a good question. You know, how will this get paid back and what impact will that have on future interest rates on federal loans? What do you think, Tim?

Tim Baker: I don’t think so. You know, I think rates for student loans have been pretty high with regard to like the federal side of things. That’s not uncommon for me to see. I mean, back — you know, if I’m working with people in their 40s and 50s, sometimes they have loans that are like 2% and I’m like, this is awesome. Because most of the time, I see 20-somethings, 30-somethings, that could be north of 7% for federal loans. And for pharmacists, those Grad PLUS loans, those add up. So and I think there is a little bit of a cry of like the government profiting on the backs of students, that type of thing. It is an unsecured debt, but it doesn’t ever go away. So like you can’t discharge student debt in bankruptcy, so it’s pretty secure in terms of like if you have student loans and you’re collecting social security, they’ll garnish that stuff. So that’s one of the problems with student loans is you can’t get away from them. So I don’t know if we see a big spike in rates after the fact. I mean, I could see the opposite, that they keep them low. But you know, who knows? You know, who knows what’s going to happen? We could see kind of a action-reaction type of thing with regard to that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think it’s a really good question. You know, this reminds me to a talking point when we talk about PSLF. We need to remember that this is a — student loans are $1.5 trillion problem that are gaining a lot of momentum politically. And if you’ve watched any of the debates this season, this is an indicator as well as what we saw as the support in the CARES Act, I think we’re going to see more of that going through the election year. So you know, in theory, of course they could. But I don’t think it’s a very popular decision right now for a lot of the flack that they take in in terms of the rising student loan debt and the impact interest rates have had. So too soon to say, but I certainly don’t think it would be a popular decision.

Tim Baker: Yeah, but I mean, but to play devil’s advocate on the other side of the aisle is you know, with Trump, he’s basically proposing to get rid of it, which again, I saw some questions get in, come in like hey, is this really a viable thing? And I think the answer is still yes despite that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: Because I still bet on the status quo versus a big change. And that’s either for like mass forgiveness or elimination. So it’s another issue where our country is very, very polarized over one issue. So but I think, again, to kind of reassure the PSLF-ers out there is that every — basically when this was enacted by President George W. Bush in 2007, every president and Congress since then has talked about getting rid of it or capping it. And it’s still here. And all of the documents and legislation, proposed legislation, to do this talks about future borrowers. So if you’re a student and you’re going to graduate in 2022, I don’t know. Maybe it will be there, maybe it won’t. But if you’re a year into PSLF and you’re in the program and you’re basically filled out the employment certification form, I think that you’re going to be fine. I would imagine if and when they ever do get rid of this, let’s pretend it’s January 1, 2025, then those people that are going to be into it — so if you’re in it December 31, 2024, your loans are going to be forgiven basically 10 years from then, essentially is what the thought is. So I think at least it’ll be grandfathered in. But the press on it is terrible. But I think it will get better.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I agree. And for those that want to learn more about this topic, we’ve covered it on the podcast a few different times. Episode 018, we talked about the benefits of PSLF. 078, we talked about is it a waste? And that was when the news had come out about 99% of borrowers or applicants of PSLF being denied. And then 114, most recently, we talked about the presidential candidates at the time predominantly was Elizabeth Warren and Bernie Sanders’ take on debt cancellation and forgiveness. So for those that had a question this evening that we did not get to, couple options I would throw out to you. One, if you aren’t already with us in the Your Financial Pharmacist Facebook group, I hope you’ll join there. We’ve got a community that’s very active and responsive. You can throw your question out there. As well as we have a weekly segment we do on the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast called Ask a YFP CFP where we do just like we’re doing here, question from a member of our community teed up for Tim Baker, our financial planner, to answer that question. You can submit your question by going to YourFinancialPharmacist.com/askYFP. So thank you so much to everybody who attended. Really, really appreciate your engagement throughout the evening. I appreciate you all taking the time to come onto the webinar tonight. I want to thank Tim Baker again for his time as well, as well as APhA for making this session possible. Have a great rest of your evening.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 145: How Samm Built DocStation to Increase Value-Based Care


How Samm Built DocStation to Increase Value-Based Care

Samm Anderegg is on a mission to fix healthcare through his company DocStation. DocStation a software platform for healthcare teams, enabling pharmacists to provide value-based care to patients. Samm talks about his shift from a traditional career path to starting his own company and how his work with DocStation aligns with his vision for the future of pharmacy practice.

About Today’s Guest

Samm Anderegg is Chief Executive Officer at DocStation, a software platform for healthcare teams, enabling pharmacists to provide value-based care to patients. After graduating with distinction from the University of Iowa College of Pharmacy, he completed post-graduate residency training and a combined Master’s degree program specializing in Health-System Pharmacy Administration at the University of Kansas. Anderegg spent two years working in oncology and ambulatory care management at Augusta University Health System in Georgia before founding DocStation.

Summary

Samm Anderegg is the CEO of DocStation, a software platform for healthcare teams that enables pharmacists to provide value-based care to patients. After graduating with distinction from the University of Iowa College of Pharmacy, he completed post-graduate residency training and a combined Master’s degree program specializing in Health-System Pharmacy Administration at the University of Kansas. Samm spent two years working in oncology and ambulatory care management at Augusta University Health System in Georgia before founding DocStation.

While he was working at Augusta University Health System, Samm saw that there were a lot of barriers to do things and that it was hard to justify the value of pharmacists and their services. He saw this as an opportunity to build a tool for pharmacists from the ground up and decided to leave his secure job to focus on his passion.

Before quitting, Samm had to assess his financial risk as he’d be leaving a six-figure salary behind and suddenly not have an income. He knew that he could eliminate some of his expenses, make minimum payments on his student loans and use his savings if needed. Luckily, he was able to get paid hourly for an IT job he’d been doing project work for which gave him the income he needed to live.

Samm found Josh, a software engineer, who became the other half of DocStation. Together they created a care management platform and electronic record system built for pharmacists. As the profession of pharmacy is changing, Samm knew that a single record system was needed to bring pharmacists into this new age. Now, it’s a tool for value-based care connecting health plans to pharmacists so they can be paid for their services.

DocStation is currently used in the Midwest across 7 states with 300 pharmacies, 700 pharmacy users, 1 major health plan and has 32,000 patients.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. It’s a pleasure to welcome onto the show Samm Anderegg, CEO of DocStation. Samm, excited to have you on the show. Welcome.

Samm Anderegg: Tim, thanks so much for allowing me to be here.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. So let’s start off and talk a little bit about your career path into pharmacy, why you went into pharmacy, and ultimately why you decided to go on and complete what is known as a fairly intensive training path of a PGY1-PGY2 combined MS in healthcare administration.

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, it started really simple. Grew up in small town Iowa and had friends and family that worked in my small hometown and had a cousin that flew the coop and went to university and got into pharmacy. And so I was a younger cousin, I looked up to all my older cousins, and you know, I was very interested in math and science. And I wanted to put that to use, so I think the big thing is, you know, knowing that you want to be interacting and helping people in the most simple sense and how do you make a career or profession out of that? And went to the University of Iowa, kind of debated between medicine and pharmacy but ultimately chose pharmacy and I’m sure glad I did it.

Tim Ulbrich: So then you make the decision and a program that’s near and dear to my heart, I direct this program at Ohio State, the combined PGY1-PGY2 MS degree, obviously a very niched, focused pathway, very intensive. You know, you’re full-time resident, full-time student. So there certainly is some strategic decisions that go into making that move. So what was it that drew you into that focus of administrative pharmacy training?

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, I think as you journey down this path that is your career, you’re constantly checking in with yourself and asking yourself, you know, what do you want to be when you grow up? And after I made that hurdle into pharmacy, it was then, you know, how can I blend my interest in what I believe that my skill set is to be fulfilled in my career? And you know, originally I thought being like in a primary care clinic and taking care of patients and building those relationships would be the way to go, but I realized that you can make a larger impact on a greater scale, be a little bit more creative, which I felt like — or what I held important — you could do that in an administrative role or a management role as the leader. And you know, I had some really great mentors at the University of Iowa that directed me to these administrative residencies, and I knew it was going to be a rough two years, but I’m a glutton for punishment, so I was a little bit excited about that as well. So that led me down the path and again, it’s just one of those decisions that you make along the way and wanted to keep myself versatile, so that’s the route I took.

Tim Ulbrich: So talk us through the work that you did after completing the combined residency and MS but before DocStation. So we’ll get there in a little bit about how you started that, what the work is you’re doing there. But what happened in between after you finished up the administrative training?

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, I think, you know, again, I wasn’t quite sure what I wanted to be when I grew up, even after residency, right? And so I was looking for full-time positions in which I could, you know, lead a team, but the responsibilities were broad, meaning they weren’t specialized in necessarily operations or clinical management. And so I took a service line job. It was at the Medical College of Georgia. I was one manager on a team of five others with a director. And so a large amount of responsibilities, had about 18 FTEs. And you know, I was curious, I wanted to build things, create things, and really make an impact in that first job. And it was a great fit for me.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. So eight years of training, so your pre-pharmacy, your pharmacy work, your administrative residency two years plus the MS degree, several years of experience, and then you make the decision that you’re going to walk away from that and start your own, start your own company. And that, of course, would be the work that you’re doing with DocStation. So tell us a little bit about that decision and how you’re able to reconcile walking away from I guess what you could say is somewhat something known and secure to then starting your own company.

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, it’s a great question. I think, you know, when I made the decision on the first job, again, going back to that creativity piece and the ability to really build things, so the job was great for the first like two and a half years is how long I lasted there. Learned a lot, implemented a lot, but I didn’t realize how much that creativity was important to me. And so after you get quite a few things done, you start getting — you start pulling back the layers of the onion and realizing that there are a lot of barriers, you know? You cross quite a few in those first two and a half years and build a lot of great relationships, but there’s some just political, structural, operational barriers to be able to do new things like if you want to implement a new software or if you want to hire more FTEs, you know the ROI is there, but it’s not just a matter of convincing someone or showing them value, it’s things that are out of your scope of influence. So I was a little frustrated by that and I think what it came down to is we were trying to implement clinical services in the ambulatory care. And you know, built proposals, submitted them one year after the next, but what I realized is it’s really hard to justify that value. And looking around for all the like different clinical tools, pharmacy documentation tools that were able to do that, there just weren’t any. And so going back to that creative piece, I was like, you know, I’ve learned a little bit, enough, throughout my career to know that there’s an opportunity here to build a tool for pharmacists from the ground up. It sounds crazy when you say that if you’re in a position to be a manager, but the more you keep thinking about it, right, and I’m sitting here burned out in my job a little bit, working hard, still enjoying it but knowing that I don’t want to do it for the next 20 years of my life. So I spent a lot of time thinking and debating, but ultimately it just becomes more and more real the more you think about it. And when you look at the other people that have started companies, you know, they’re just like you and I. They’re just regular people. They were just willing to take that risk. And so then it became analyzing the risk and the financial piece, how do I actually do this? So you know, I kind of went from there and jumped off the ledge.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s talk about that for a moment before I jump into exactly what is DocStation, what’s the problem you’re trying to solve with that, but talk us through, talk our listeners through how you did analyze that risk. I think that’s something that often, people are thinking about as oh, maybe I’ve got a great idea or I see people like Samm doing some cool stuff, but I can’t imagine walking away from my known six-figure job or I’ve got lots of student loan debt, got all these issues to deal with. So how did you walk through that risk and really try to objectively evaluate what the risk and the opportunity was?

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, so I think even before I got to that point, it was making sure I found something that I was extremely passionate about, right? It hit all of my boxes like the technology piece, the creativity piece, the leadership piece and really building something, creating something out of nothing. I was extremely motivated to try this out at the beginning, right? And it’s, you know, the risk at that point is really just time risks. So I was working a full-time job, and I would go home in the evenings — you know, eat dinner, throw something in the microwave really quick, and then spend the next five or six hours just reading and listening to podcasts and trying to absorb as much information as possible, building out financial models, like whatever I could do to validate whether this was going to be a viable business or not. And you know, as that progressed, that got into a couple months’ worth of time where I was like running on no sleep basically to the point where I knew there was an opportunity there, it was just a matter of whether I wanted to take that next step of risk and ultimately decided that if I wanted to, what would I need to change? And I just needed to create more time. I needed to create more time for myself and really, the only way to do that was to eliminate those 40-60 hours a week that was my full-time job as a pharmacy manager. So you know, analyzed how I would do that and happy to kind of walk through those steps as well. I know a lot of people have ideas. It’s like, how do I actually put this into action? But the first thing is the risk of time. And that’s a good test to make sure that you are passionate about it if you’re willing to stay up until 2, 3 in the morning doing those things because you love it so much.

Tim Ulbrich: I’m so glad you said that too because I think that’s a common theme. I know I felt it when I was starting the work with YFP, but you hear it so often among business owners that are working full-time and then they start their own company simultaneously is that they will talk about it as if you hear the hours and you’re like, oh my gosh, it’s exhausting. But that person is so passionate about the idea that they don’t see that same level of exhaustion. You know, they’re so eager to learn and so eager to jump in and really see is this viable and how do I learn more about the industry and what’s happening? Talk me through more of the financial risk. You mentioned the time piece. I hear you there. But I’m guessing many are listening saying, you know, “How do I go from $120,000 to nothing?” You know, we know many business owners as you start, obviously you’re investing a lot back in the business. How did you assess the actual financial risks and what you might need to change, you know, if anything, to make that a reality?

Samm Anderegg: Yep. So I think I was about two and a half years into my job, so I was two and a half years into being used to that type of salary, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Samm Anderegg: And you know, I definitely like spent money to travel and do things like that, but I didn’t build everything into my day-to-day life where it would be really hard to untangle all of that stuff. It’s still hard, don’t get me wrong. It’s hard for anyone to do that, but what I — I looked at my savings account, how much of an emergency fund did I really have left and how much did I think, how long did I think that that would last? I looked at basically my primary income going to $0, so how do I make up — like what is it that I need to cover the bare minimum, right? What costs can I cut? It was really like a full-on slash of everything. I discontinued all my subscriptions, I eliminated my rent and figured, OK, I could stay with some friends for a little while while I figure this out. I put my student loans down to minimum payments. I was paying more than double what I owed. So did that exercise and then came up with a number, a monthly number that I needed to make up. And what I didn’t mention in my background is, you know, since like about 2010, I was involved in health IT, specifically on the pharmacy side. And so it started off as a project and eventually grew into through residency, I worked on this project. And then when I took that first job, they started paying me a little bit hourly for my expertise I had developed over the last three years, so there was work there. So an opportunity to do more hours and again, I was working on my own thing and full-time job, so I didn’t really have any time to dedicate to that. But that was an opportunity. I just basically said, “Hey, if you need me to do this, here’s how much I need per month,” and was able to negotiate that. So and you know, that was kind of like an opportunity and timing type thing. But I think, you know, whatever you’re doing, you’re trying to figure out any way you can make up that income, whether it’s passive income, whether it’s if you’re partner is willing to help you out in the meantime, if you want to start building up that savings account, that emergency fund early on, you know, lots of different options. It just depends on your situation. And that was mine.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think if I could add there too, Samm — I don’t know if you felt much of this — I know for me and a conversation my wife and I often have and really finding value in talking to other people because when you’re in it, it’s hard to see it. But I think often, I project the risk to be greater than it really is. And when you take a step back and you think about, OK, your training, if things were to fall flat in 6 or 12 months, it’s not like you’re not going to have options. You’ve got a network, you’ve got lots of training, right? So really taking a step back to say, not only for your individual financial plan what is true risk, but also career-wise, you know, play out the worst case scenario. And then if that’s the worst thing that could happen, which is likely to be unimaginable, OK, anything else, what’s really the risk that’s associated with that? One question I have for you, when you talked about coming home in the evenings and spending 5-6 hours, you know, really learning more about the business side, doing some modeling, how much of that learning was industry-specific to the area that you wanted to do with DocStation, and how much of it was more in kind of the business side of it and starting up a business and all that was entailed in doing that?

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, none of it was industry-specific or pharmacy-specific, even healthcare-specific. And you know, you kind of start searching to see if there’s anyone out there talking about that in our particular field, but there’s just really not. And I thought, you know, when I first — a little bit disappointed at first, but then you realize that if you’re going to make this work for healthcare, for pharmacy or whatever, it’s industry-agnostic. Building a business, building a startup, there are different rules that you have to play by. And I think it’s better to learn from people that have done it in different industries and then figure out how that applies to healthcare and to pharmacy. And there are some nuances in the healthcare space that don’t apply to social media marketing, e-commerce and things like that. But those are the little things that you pick up along the way and fit into your puzzle as you go forward.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s talk about and transition to DocStation. What is it? Why is it important? And what’s the problem that you’re trying to solve with DocStation?

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, so DocStation is a care management platform or an Electronic Health Record built for pharmacists. The big thing that we’re trying to do is in the community pharmacy space, you know, the business model for the last dozens of years, decades, right, has been built on dispensing prescriptions and the administrative fees that come along with that and the margin that we make on the actual product. And just within the last two or three years, extreme pressure that is putting that at risk, putting pharmacies at risk. And so, I don’t know, I just kind of saw that, you know, you see every other product that has the ability to be shipped, delivered to people’s door in two days, so what’s going to happen to our profession? And so you know, I looked at community pharmacy, there’s really no one, clinical record or EHR system that folks use that’s built specifically to bring pharmacy to the new age and the clinical age, and that was the gap that I was trying to fill. And so I experimented with a lot of different ways to get started. Like the main thing is like, how are you going to bring in money for this business, right? Where’s your revenue going to come from? And thought pharmacies at first, but you know, the more you look at the market, the more you look at healthcare outside of pharmacy. Everything is moving to value-based care.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Samm Anderegg: And the folks that are going to make the most money in that type of equation are the health plans. They’re going to have the most value from that, right? And so we began to talk to health plans about that. And so the idea, the product itself, has evolved over time. You know, it started as like an EHR you sell to pharmacists as like a subscription fee. And now, it’s really a tool for value-based care or value-based pharmacy, connecting health plans directly with pharmacies to facilitate value-based care models.

Tim Ulbrich: So help our listeners understand how that differentiates from others that have been in the space for awhile. So I remember wrapping up residency in 2008. Here in Ohio, we had a big Medicaid MTM contract that came to be, lots of excitement around community pharmacists, community pharmacies getting involved in Medication Therapy Management services, lots of frustrations that were also happening because the caseload really wasn’t significant enough at the time — obviously, a lot has changed — significant enough at the time to be able to efficiently operationalize it in a store. So you saw these models evolving to where you’d have one clinical pharmacist going around to multiple stores trying to do these cases. Is it really viable? Is it something you can justify continuing? So the MTM delivery and a care platform at the community pharmacy has been around for awhile. It certainly has its challenges. So what is the work that you’re doing at DocStation? How does it differ from those existing platforms?

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, I think going back to how is pharmacy unique, right? You mentioned MTM. Because we have this burden, and now I’m seeing it as an opportunity that we haven’t been classified as providers under the Social Security Act, you know, we didn’t fall down the typical path that physicians at hospitals did, meaning billing fee for service CPT codes.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Samm Anderegg: So we have been fighting tooth and nail for any sort of reimbursement for clinical services. And we’ve been very resourceful, so part of Medicare Part D passing was MTM was mandated, right? But MTM is a specific segment or specific way that pharmacists can get paid for services, and it’s wildly different than billing a CPT code for chronic care management. And that’s also wildly different from contracting directly with an outpatient physician’s office to help them improve quality measures. So you mentioned the big thing was how do we get our caseload up to make this actually a viable business for me to open a practice, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Yep, yep.

Samm Anderegg: And so our belief is that if you build a tool that’s robust enough to incorporate all these different clinical revenue opportunities, and you take all of the administrative burden away, you leave the pharmacist with the simple message of take care of the patient and you’ll get paid. You’ll get paid enough to have a stable income, provide for your family, and if you’re ambitious, you know, build a large clinical practice out of it. And so that’s what we’re aiming to do and that’s why I believe that we’re different.

Tim Ulbrich: So what is holding this back from scaling? You know, I feel like one of the things that I’ve always struggled with thinking through the evolution of the community pharmacist’s role beyond the dispensing prescriptions is we seem to have pockets and pilots and areas of success, but we have yet to really see something scale. So in your world, what is preventing that from happening? And you know, is this a solution that can help that scaling happen?

Samm Anderegg: Great question. Well, getting into it, people told me this a million times. Software takes a heck of a lot longer to build than you think it’s going to, right? And that’s true. But regardless, healthcare and pharmacy and all of the different segments or ways to get reimbursed are incredibly complex, like way more complex than really any other industry. And that’s one of those unique things about healthcare. It would take two or three years to build out a clinical billing tool that works really well, designed well, and people are going to use it over and over again. And that’s just one segment, right? Then you’ve got to look at MTM, and then you’ve got to look at direct contracting and all these different things. And all the while, the market’s emerging and requirements are changing. And so you know, I think the first thing is just picking a specialty to start in. Where do you want to start that you think you’re going to generate enough interest and engagement from users and it’s going to fund your business so that you can grow and add new tooling to it? And so you know, I think that’s — the biggest barrier is just, you know, building a HIPPA-compliant, cloud-based platform that’s usable and applicable to a large group of pharmacies and pharmacists that find it useful. And then I think the next thing is really, you know, the marketing and adoption piece. And so how do you — again, this is not anything that I was taught in pharmacy school or residency — but how do you market a software product to a buyer who is really a health plan? Like enterprise sales is, again, not in our textbooks. So figuring out how to do that, what type of people you need on the team, what the strategy is, it’s incredibly complex. And sales cycles, again, thinking about healthcare, sales cycles are 18-24 months. That just means that’s how long it takes from the first conversation you have with a potential customer to actually closing a contract. You know, probably one of the worst industries to try to do that in. And a lot of people are doing it and figuring it out, and we are too. It just takes time.

Tim Ulbrich: It takes time. I want to think through this a little bit more from the user standpoint as well as from your standpoint from the business end. Obviously those are connected, but if we have somebody listening who’s at the frontlines in a community pharmacy and they’re hearing this and they’re like, “Yes. This is what I’ve been looking for, what I want to do,” how do they get this off the ground? I mean, are you working with the payer and then you reach out to the pharmacies that the payer is working with? Or can the pharmacy drive that up through you guys to then initiate the payer contracts? How would somebody listening, thinking about this, begin to put in place how they might operationalize it?

Samm Anderegg: This is awesome. I love talking about this stuff. I’m glad you’re asking these questions because there’s things that we’ve been asking ourselves for a really long time. And what I would say — and again, at this point in time, if we were to do this interview 12 months from now, the answer would probably be different.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Samm Anderegg: But at this point in time, we know that if we have a health plan that’s a partner, and they want to pay pharmacists for services, they just don’t know how to roll out that program, and sign up the pharmacies and make sure they’re credentialed and facilitate the payment. We know that we can walk into a health plan and provide a turnkey solution in the next 30 days. And we know that pharmacists will sign up for our platform and use our platform to get paid with that type of model because we’re doing it in the Midwest, we’re doing it across seven states, 300 pharmacies, 700 pharmacy users, one major health plan. And we’re eager to repeat that. We just need a pharmacy partner, someone at a payer that’s like, yeah, I like what these guys are doing and I believe in it. And on the other end, if you’re a pharmacist, right, you’re like, OK, I don’t know how I can help you with that if you don’t have a contact on the payer side. But on the pharmacy end, what we’re thinking is hey, if we build a tool that provides enough value like it creates more efficiency or it brings you new types of data, it helps you do things easier than other software that you’re using today or maybe you’re paying for software that does something that we can replace at no cost, right? We want to give you our tool for free. Like you can go to the website right now, sign up, we can get you basically turned in less than 24 hours. And you have access to the software. The main barrier right now is OK, now I’ve got to enter my patients in manually, hand type them in just as if you were starting with a brand new EHR. And we’re working to automate that to transfer your patients over automatically. But the key is if our tool is good enough, use it to be efficient, get data to show your value, and that makes the conversations a heck of a lot easier when you do approach your payer or whoever in your region, say, “Hey, you know, I’d really like to provide care for your members, your patients, and you’re going to get value when I do that. And let me show you why.” It helps you fuel your pitch to continue to grow your business. So that’s the second side of the coin.

Tim Ulbrich: So the website, just so you mentioned that, DocStation.co, DocStation.co if you want to go there and check it out, learn more. And I think just to build off of what you said, I mean, to me, the way we — as I hear and understand this, obviously you know much better than I do — but as we think about scaling this, it really needs uptake. I mean, it needs uptake from the payer side, it needs uptake from the pharmacy side. So part of my hope in sharing your story — not only sharing your entrepreneurial journey but also we know that we have a lot of listeners all across the country that might have some of these relationships or their pharmacies may be interested. And I’m hopeful we can see some momentum there. So you mentioned seven states, 300+ pharmacies. How many — you mentioned the payer — how many patients thus far have you served or you’re working with?

Samm Anderegg: So it’s roughly 32,000 patients.

Tim Ulbrich: OK, awesome. And then on the other side — I mentioned I wanted to talk about it from the pharmacist’s side — from the business side of it, as you’re willing to share, talk to use a little bit more about — obviously not specific numbers — but how you think about this from a, OK, at the end of the day, we’ve got to generate revenue. There’s a business model here. So what does that look like in terms of the payer relationships and how you build out a viable business model.

Samm Anderegg: Right. So when you’re in startup land, two ways to bring in money. And by bring in money, it means you’re on a fast track to grow your company, right? So you need to — really the biggest expense is hiring people. So hiring software engineers to build the product, expand the product, new features, maybe build it a little bit faster, but speed is usually not correlated with FTEs in that sense. And so you know, you could sell or you could fundraise. And I think what most people see on Twitter and in the news and on the show Silicon Valley is like you go out there and you raise multiple millions of dollars at these sky-high valuations that just seem fake. And that still goes on to a certain sense today, but it’s really hard for someone who’s coming out of healthcare with no previous experience starting a traditional technology company to say, “I’m a subject matter expert and I’ve got this really great idea that is really complicated to explain, but you should write us a check for $2 million.” That’s tough. It was really tough, and I wasn’t able to do it to get started. And so you know, you start looking at on the customer side and you look at health plans. And so what we’ve done is at first, it was bootstrapping. I drained down my savings account to basically $0, my cofounder did the same. I was able to convince my cofounder to take that risk as well. That was the first step. And then when you close your first customer, you’re saying, “OK. We’re bringing in x amount of money. How many people can we afford to hire?” And it’s really about understanding what — and these are different financial terms from the everyday life or everyday business — it’s about your runway and your burn rate. How much are you spending? How quick? And when are you going to die? And how do you make sure that you’ve got enough cash on hand to continue to extend that timeline? And you’re up — all the while, you’re weighing a lot of different factors. OK, if I fundraise from this group, do I trust them? Do I want to work with them for the next 10 years? Because you’re basically getting married to them. And they’re going to take a significant portion of equity in your company, and they’re going to have a board seat. And so there’s lots of things to calculate and understand and weigh. But you’re doing this pretty much daily, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Samm Anderegg: And so yeah, you know, we’re going hard on the sales and the customer thing. We believe that our product’s at a place right now where it’s going to generate immediate value for a health plan. And we’re working on that on the pharmacy side too. I believe the tool is really great. We need pharmacists to tell us, hey, this is what’s missing. I would use this if. And all the while, you’re looking at that bank account every day and you’re saying, OK, how much time have we got? How much time we got? How much time we got? Until you’re ready to pull the trigger and find an alternative source of funding. So that’s the current situation, man.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think just hearing you talk, you know, kind of bringing this full circle, it goes back to you better be doing something that you love here and you’re passionate about, you believe in, because when you’re talking about things like drain your bank account, going into partnerships, cofounders, challenges that come — I mean, don’t get me wrong, I wouldn’t change any of it for the world and if you have that itch and desire and passion about something, you just can’t ignore it. You know as well as I do, you’re going down this path regardless. You can’t stop it. But it better be down something you love because it’s going to have a lot of implications. And I even think on the money side, I’ve been listening to a lot of The Pitch podcast on Gimlet Media, and great stuff. But you know, kind of that fundraising side, and I think often we think of this glorious side of raising money, but there’s also this other side of you have lots of opinions now, you’ve got baggage that comes with that, you’re obviously giving up equity, so you know, there’s pros and cons to that. And obviously you guys decided to try to cash flow as much as you can up front and obviously there’s challenges with that as well. Talk to me for a moment about a cofounder as well as the first hires. I think that’s a lot we don’t hear about in the business trajectory and growth. We hear a lot of the glorious parts of you start something, you got a cool idea, you’re doing your own business, and that’s like cool. What we don’t talk about is some of that next phase challenges I would say like bringing on partners or even hiring your first employee at the expense of paying yourself because you really feel like that’s what you need. So what was that decision like? You know, was it a cofounder from the beginning? Was it somebody you brought on later? And how did you make that decision of what would be additional benefit obviously that they would bring perhaps and a different expertise?

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, I think my administrative training in management, you did some hiring with that. You know, in my first job, I hired quite a few people. But when it comes to starting something from the ground up and your cofounder is really like a first hire but so much more than that, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Samm Anderegg: There’s so much more risk in choosing the wrong person, especially with that cofounder situation. So you know, when you’re looking at startups and the most successful ones and how they got started, it’s like, you know, these people have been friends since childhood and one ran off to be a software engineer and the other got her MBA and they circled back and found this great idea and they built a $1 billion company. I didn’t have any of those types of friends. And you know, you just — what I’ve learned is you just talk about to everyone that you know. And you know, I had some friends in pharmacy that were interested and ultimately, I needed the skillset that I needed to complement my own was on the software engineering side. Right? You need someone to actually build the product. And so what I did is I knew that this is a person that I wanted to — really, I needed a friend, a friend that seemed like a childhood friend that I knew that was willing to — we could go through tough times together and come out on top and someone that was really empathetic and caring and like understood, you know, the risk and really be in it together. So what you have to do is when you’re meeting somebody blind, which I did — I met like four or five different people that I did some projects with, right? You start with a project, see how that project goes, how you really work together, and then spend time with them personally too to talk through things to see if you’re a match. And so yeah, I found Josh in Austin. I looked everywhere. But met him, met his wife Rachel and you know, I feel like I’m a member of their family now and vice versa. And so you’ve just got to be careful and do as much testing as you can. And I think the people that I met before Josh, it didn’t feel right, but I kind of wanted to continue to try to make it work. But you know, when we did meet up and start working together, you could feel it, you know? It felt right. It felt like it fit.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think you often hear about the negative side of partnerships. I know I did. I grew up in a small business family where a partnership went bad, you know, in a family business, so I felt like I heard very much of that side. But I think you don’t hear as much of the positives that can come — and I know speaking from personal experience, sounds like for you as well, I could not imagine going at it alone. And I think if you find that right relationship or fit, what you can get in terms of not only different expertise, perspective, but I think it’s a classic example of two are better than one alone. And I think you get a duplicate effect when you have really the right fit and the different expertise that two people can bring. When I think about a CEO role, I think about things like obviously strategic direction of the business, you’re thinking about the leading the team, and I know you’ve got a team that works with you and that presents its own set of opportunities and challenges. You think about business development, strategic relationships, really being the face of the company, which one, is very different than anything we’ve ever trained for in school or even in the residency you went through but also is very different than likely the role you started out with in the company where you’re really in the weeds on the product side. So talk to me about that transition to that role, maybe struggles you’ve had or how you’ve effectively made that transition where you can kind of take more of that global perspective and when you have other people on board, really serving in that CEO role of driving the strategic direction of the company, allowing the other people to be in the weeds on the other parts.

Samm Anderegg: Yeah. It’s — you learn as you go is the big thing. I know that’s general, it’s not really great advice by any means. But you do. And I think intuitively, you know it’s all about focus. What is the most important thing that you need to do? What is the biggest thing that’s blocking you from taking the next step? That’s what it is at the very early stage. And so the first one was OK, finding a cofounder because I knew I couldn’t fundraise and I knew it would take too long to code. So once I found Josh, it was like OK, what’s the next thing? Well, we need to build something that people will buy. And so you know, we built a prototype and helped work on that. And at the very beginning stage, I was like helping out with the back end architecture and used my whatever I borrowed from Microsoft Access skills that I learned in residency. Like you know, trying to build the database. It didn’t go well. I’m not in that position anymore. I’m not — but you know, you just, priorities change and new things come up and they shift. And at the early stage, it’s really on a monthly basis, maybe. But as your business grows and you bring on new people and you start delegating some responsibilities, things get more complex. I hate to say it. They get more complex, and you’re trying to figure out where can I make the most impact this week?

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Samm Anderegg: Or this quarter. And a lot of it — and every company is a little bit different, depending on who you have on the team, what your roles are and what your biggest, what you’re trying to accomplish. But where I fit in now is really sales and leadership and building a team. We went through this accelerator program called TechStars. It’s like a three-month residency program, if you want to put it in pharmacy terms, for young startup companies to try to give you the skills on the tech side. Yeah, it was exactly what we needed at that point in time. But the biggest lesson I took away about the CEO role is when things get so complex and hazy, it’s like you have three responsibilities: vision, people, and funding.

Tim Ulbrich: Oh, so good. Yep.

Samm Anderegg: So that, you know, I can sigh and relax a little bit when I remind myself that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep. I love that. And that’s a good reminder, reminder for me. It’s just such a shift from the roles that we’re used to, either in our day job or the way we’ve been trained. And I’ve been following along your newsletter. And I think I can see that you’re doing an awesome job of that with your team and really focusing on the team aspect of it. So one question I have for you is about the future — kind of combines the future of the business and the future of the profession. You know, as I understand your product is really focusing on leveraging the community pharmacist to be able to interact with patients and provide the service that they’re trained to do and connecting the payers to pharmacies to do this. Two ways of looking at this: One is that this is an area that’s being disrupted. Will community pharmacy — obviously I’m being dramatic here — will community pharmacy exist in terms of the brick-and-mortar? There’s disruptors like Amazon, PillPack, others that are gaining in the space. Margins are being cut, we’ve got PBM issues, DIR fees, all these things. Will that model exist? And therefore, what’s the threat potentially depending on that model? The other way of looking at that is that you’ve got in this brick-and-mortar pharmacy world, we’re the most successful healthcare professional in the country. So we are theoretically placed and ready to be in the prime position to do exactly what you’re trying to do and grow. So I’m guessing this dichotomy is something you think about often in terms of the disruptions happening in the industry but also simultaneously the opportunity that exists with your business model. So talk us through how you envision that and how you think through that.

Samm Anderegg: Yeah, man, I think you hit the nail on the head. And you’re not being dramatic at all. You know, I’ve been talking about this for years and more critically in the past couple years. We’ve got a lot of industry pressure going on, specifically in the community pharmacy setting. And so you know, we’ve got this coronavirus thing happening right now, and it’s like, man, you know, we could have got out ahead of this, in front of this, and people were downplaying it. I think we’re in the same situation in pharmacy. Right? Like if you realize that there are pressures, if you don’t feel them, if you’re not a business owner or community pharmacy owner and you’re not writing the tens of thousands of dollars in checks back to the PBM for these DIR fees, and you see your volume decreasing as people are shifting to mail-order or PBMs are requiring mail-order, man, it’s rough out there. And it’s going to happen quick. But you know, what I — going back to your second point is it is an opportunity. But we have to be ready, right? And the biggest missing piece that I saw and really, another huge reason to start the company, is that let’s say this happened in a more positive light. Let’s say either federal government gave us provider status tomorrow. And all of a sudden, pharmacists could be reimbursed in the same rate as physicians for the services that were within their scope of practice determined by their state. OK, what next? Right? And I don’t think most people who are advocating for this have a good answer for that.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s exactly right. Yep.

Samm Anderegg: And so you know, we — these negative pressures are — they’re being applied. It’s a little bit longer term, just not kind of an instantaneous need. But we still have that gap, and so that’s what we’re trying to build in this tool. And DocStation is we want to be able to hand this piece of software over to a pharmacist and say, “Alright, provider status gets passed tomorrow or your business starts taking a hit and you need a new clinical revenue stream, here you go. Sign up, start providing care, and money will get deposited in your bank account.” So you know, it’s inevitable. Like our profession is going to change.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Samm Anderegg: And we need to do everything that we can to start preparing for that. I think a lot of entities are, they’re preaching that word, but we’ve got to be in this together you guys.

Tim Ulbrich: I agree, and I think your point is so spot-on that we’ve been spending so much time talking about things like the acquisition of provider status. And we talk a lot here in Ohio and I think nationwide as well that without payment, without contracts, that’s really a symbolic move. And I think the question is how do you operationalize it and not only how do you operationalize it, but are we ready and are we willing and wanting to operationalize it as a profession? And I think the research, a lot of the research and work that hasn’t been done is I know living in the academic circles, living in the association circles, it’s all talked about in a positive tone. But I don’t think that’s representative of how everyone feels about it for good reasons of the challenges they’re facing on the frontlines. And I really want to give a shoutout here, I think some of the work that we’re doing in Ohio, the Ohio Pharmacists Association, my colleagues at Ohio State, Jen Rhodes, Stu Badey, Michael Murphy, Christine Mason, they are asking these questions and really having some of this conversation and doing the work talking about how do we actually operationalize provider status, Bridget Groves at OPA, and really get past just that symbolic passing of the legislation. And I think the work that you’re doing at DocStation so nicely aligns with that as well. Last question I have for you, kind of a fun, light-hearted one, you know, here you are, obviously in this CEO role of DocStation, thinking about the future of the profession, the vision. What are you drawing from? What are you reading, what are you listening to where you draw some of your inspiration and get some of the knowledge that inspires the work that you do?

Samm Anderegg: That’s a great question. Depends on the time and what current issue or stage or what’s most important when I try to find a book that is loosely related to that. And even if I pick up a random book, a lot of times, the timing is right. But you know, at the beginning, there’s a couple books that I took from, Y Combinator Startup School has founders come in and lecture, like successful ones and they mention they’re reading this. And so “Crossing the Chasm” was probably one of the most influential books that I read. It’s about marketing, it’s about introducing a new product to a market and who you need to target. That was huge. Another one, I thought I knew tech, but I didn’t understand what tech really was on a large scale, on a global scale. And so “Behind the Cloud,” which was written by the founder of SalesForce in San Francisco. That was a really influential book. And recently, you know, now that we’ve progressed a little bit as a company and we’re trying to build a sustainable business that is durable for years, I went back to the basics and picked up Jim Collin’s “Good to Great,” and man, what a great read that is about research-based and gives you the right tools and things to focus on and helps you simplify it. That has been the most impactful one lately. And I’ll throw in one more if that’s OK.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure. Absolutely.

Samm Anderegg: Yeah. If you’re starting a business, “The Hard Thing About Hard Things” by Ben Horowitz of Andresen-Horowitz is like my pacifier. Like if something’s going wrong, or it’s just a slog, you’re in that rut, which you do, you go in ruts and then you have peaks. But man, that is — he just does a great job of not telling you here’s 10 steps to building a successful company but here’s what it’s really like and here’s how messy it is and here’s what happened to us, here’s what we did in those scenarios. So you know, when you think times are tough, you know you’re not alone reading that book. So yeah, I highly recommend that.

Tim Ulbrich: We’ll link to all three of those in the show notes. I’ve got two new ones to add to my reading list, “Crossing the Chasm” and “The Hard Things about Hard Things” and then rereading “Good to Great.” So good reminder on those. Two part question to wrap up here, Samm. Where can our listeners go to learn more about DocStation, the work that you’re doing? And then how can they get involved as well if they’ve heard something today and they say, I want to be a part of this.

Samm Anderegg: Yep. Easiest way to get in touch is go to the website, DocStation.co. There’s a “Get Started” button in the top right. Click that, fill out the form. And I know that seems like rudimentary or like not very personal, but it notifies us directly and notifies me directly. And so we’ve got a great couple people that watch that, monitor that 24/7. Response rate is in like three minutes. And so we’ll reach out to you directly. And then we’ll become personal, I promise you. That’s the easiest way to do it.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Samm, thank you so much for taking the time, for sharing your journey. I know you’ve inspired me and I have a feeling will do the same for many of our listeners. So thank you very much.
Samm Anderegg: Thanks, Tim. It was a pleasure.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 144: How Two Pharmacists Paid Off $214k of Student Loans in 17 Months


How Two Pharmacists Paid Off $214k of Student Loans in 17 Months

Levi Ellison, PharmD, shares how he and his wife paid off $214,594.55 of student loans over 17 months. Levi talks about the motivations behind such an aggressive repayment strategy, how they were able to do it and what they hope to accomplish now that they are debt free.

About Today’s Guest

Levi Ellison has been married to his loving wife, Jessica Ellison, since the summer of 2018 following their May graduation from the University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences College of Pharmacy in Little Rock. While in pharmacy school Levi was a winning team member of the 2017 Good Neighbor Pharmacy National Community Pharmacy Association Pruitt-Schutte Student Business Plan. Immediately following graduation he received a $20,000 sign on bonus for a 2-year commitment to work in his hometown of Mena, Arkansas as a staff pharmacist at Walgreens. He serves as a Sunday school teacher for young adults at Salem Baptist Church, Treasurer of the Polk County Republican Committee, and served as a Financial Peace University Coordinator. He enjoys running, traveling with his wife, spending time with his family, and being debt free!

Summary

Levi Ellison shares his remarkable story of how he and Jessica, his wife who is also a pharmacist, paid off $214,594.55 of student loan debt over 17 months. While in school, Levi and Jessica were pretty aware of how much money they were taking out and knew that they didn’t feel good about taking out more than they needed. That mentally paired with some scholarships allowed them to both graduate under the average debt load that most pharmacists carry.

They were motivated by Joe Baker’s personal finance class in pharmacy school and by Dave Ramsey’s book Total Money Makeover. Following the Dave Ramsey approach, they knew that they wanted to attack their debt in a gazelle-like fashion so that they could move on to other financial goals that are important to them. By following a strict budget and using a budgeting app called EveryDollar along with a homemade allocated spending budget, they were able to pay off $214,594.55 in 17 months while tithing 10% of their gross income to their church. This payoff breaks down to:

$151,478.51/year

$12,623.21/month

$2,899.93/week

$414.28/day

Levi discusses how they worked together as a team to accomplish this goal and what their plans are now that they aren’t spending over $12,000 a month on student loans.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist. Excited to welcome Levi Ellison onto the show to share his debt-free story. Levi, welcome and thank you for taking the time.

Levi Ellison: Thank you, Tim. It’s great to be with you.

Tim Ulbrich: So grateful that you reached out to share your incredible story of paying off a lot of debt, a lot of debt, in a really, really short period of time. When I first heard about your story, you and your wife Jessica tackling over $214,000 of debt over 17 months, I thought to myself, wow, what an amazing accomplishment. And I can’t wait to hear exactly more of the details about how you accomplished this and why you were so aggressive in your repayment. And I’m excited to share this with the YFP community as well. So let’s start. Can you share a little bit of background about you and your wife Jessica, where you went to school and then ultimately the work that you’re doing now?

Levi Ellison: Yes. So my wife and I, Jessica, we went to the University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences. And that’s in Little Rock, Arkansas. We met in school there, pretty much simultaneously there and our church and in Sunday school. So we were in the same classes, we were in the same church, so we’re doing everything together and ended up getting married the summer following pharmacy school. And on our honeymoon, we got a — I received a sign-on bonus from Walgreens and that was a substantial figure and if you don’t mind me sharing, I’ll just tell the YFP community, it was $20,000. And that sounds awesome and it sounds great. It’s like, wow, you could put $20,000 straight towards loans. But once it hits your bank account, it suspiciously looked like $13,000.

Tim Ulbrich: The tax.

Levi Ellison: Yeah, yeah. It was terrible. But that day it hit our account on our honeymoon. As soon as we got home, we put that all towards loans. And that really got the ball rolling. And we were, you know, obviously very intense with the way we paid off loans just from the get-go and never looking back I think really set up a strong foundation for us.

Tim Ulbrich: So and I want to make sure our audience understands, so two pharmacists, obviously.

Levi Ellison: Yes. Right.

Tim Ulbrich: But nonetheless, as people start to translate this to their personal situation, something I mentioned to you before the show, is I did that for me, two pharmacists’ income, there’s only so much take-home pay. So when we talk about, you know, figures like $12,600 roughly per month over that 17-month period on average, that means there was a lot of sacrifice, a lot of cutting of expenses and obviously now you’re on the back end of that, and we’ll talk about the journey between, but nonetheless, two pharmacists’ income does not necessarily just mean that this was an easy path. And so I want to re-emphasize that. Now, one of the things, Levi, I often wonder is we don’t talk much about the accrual phase of the debt. You know, we talk about the debt paydown part of it, but for someone who clearly had very strong motivations right after school to get this paid off, I’m wondering, I’m guessing many of our listeners are wondering, well, what did you think about this while you were in school? Did it really dawn on you? Did it bother you? And as you look back, what strategies did you take or could you have taken to mitigate some of that damage rather than obviously what we’re going to talk a lot about as the payoff part?

Levi Ellison: Tim, that’s a fantastic question, no kidding. I love to answer that. So for me, during school, you know, the first time I signed up for a student loan was my first year of pharmacy school. I took out $20,000. And I thought, phew, this hurts, as I’m sure most of us experienced. I don’t think I like this. And I didn’t. And it started to wear on me. You know, your first year, you’re thinking, I’m just excited to be here.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Levi Ellison: But as you — if you log in maybe once every couple years during pharmacy school and you look, you’re kind of shocked. And I was. And so they did a few small scholarships while I was in school, and I applied for those. Got $1,000 here, $1,000 there. But when you’re talking about the kind of numbers that pharmacy school costs, that’s just not a huge percentage. Every bit helps, but my fourth year of school, they have like a — I don’t know what you would call it — but an ultimate scholarship. It was $15,000 from UAMS that they give away to one student. And I applied for that, had to write an essay, and I got it. And that was really helpful, you know? I could have been more in debt than I was. And so I got that, and then I also applied for a rural scholarship where our Arkansas State Board of Pharmacy, if you’ll go and work in an area of I think it’s 15,000 or less people — I forget all the details. But I know my hometown qualified, and so I was like, I’m going to go back home anyway if they’re going to pay me to do it. I’ll take $15,000 for that and go. And so — it was $15,000 for the scholarship. I got $7,500 from the state board. And so that was over the course of a couple years of pharmacy school, so that helped mitigate some of my own student loans.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Levi Ellison: And then my wife, I think she was fiscally conservative too. And I know she’s going to be listening to this. But I was able to get some of those things, and so that helped on my side. So it wasn’t like I just came out of school and suddenly noticed that I had debt. I mean, I was realizing this and had I known it while I was in undergrad — because we both came out of undergrad debt-free completely. And so that was helpful. But if I’d have really thought this through, I would have started earlier.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Levi Ellison: So if there’s aspiring pharmacists out there that are listening to this show and wonder how they can get through school debt-free, be smart is going to be some of the things I’m sure we’re going to talk about as far as budgeting and saving and I wish I’d have done more of that earlier.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and you and I both know from personal experience just how interest accrues on those loans, especially when you’re in graduate school, unsubsidized loans. And I think what you said is really profound — I felt the same way. You’re in school the first year, you’re excited about the opportunity, you’re not really thinking much about it or what this will be at the end. And what it sounds like, though, what I heard there, Levi, is that you guys really did some things in terms of scholarships and you mentioned the rural piece that allowed you to be in less debt than you could have been.

Levi Ellison: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: I mean, if we look at the averages now, graduates today roughly $170,000. So if we’re going to multiply that by two, obviously you guys worked with a lot of debt, but you were for two pharmacist graduates, you were below the average when you combine the two of those together. So but I think wisdom there, you know, students that are listening, you know, that’s what we kind of always preach is hey, anything that you can be doing to minimize the amount that’s borrowed, even if it seems insignificant, you know, if it’s $18,000 a semester instead of $20,000 a semester, that compounds because of interest and multiple semesters over time.

Levi Ellison: Right. Yeah, if I could add one other tidbit to that, Tim —

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Levi Ellison: We both worked while we were in school. I think that’s important not only just financially but just learning. If you want to be a good pharmacist, I don’t think your first day behind the counter ought to be the day you get your license. And so that was helpful as well, clearly, for both of us.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. Yeah, and I think that’s another good reminder, even if that hourly wage doesn’t seem super significant in the scheme of things, it adds up. I want to talk for a moment about the education piece — and a shoutout here to Joe Baker, who we’ve had on the show, has been long in the financial education space at UAMS I think teaching that personal finance elective course since 1999 and has had what I interpret to be a very profound impact on many students coming out of that program and his teachings. And I sense the same here. So tell me a little bit about that class, the personal finance elective that he taught. And what were some of the big takeaways and ultimately what impact that had on your own personal journey?

Levi Ellison: Yeah, so Joe Baker is a tremendous teacher. He gets in there and really makes the class engage. And that was a big reason I guess why I learned so much in there. And I do owe a lot of influence and credit to him for our story. That’s where we picked up the book “The Total Money Makeover” by Dave Ramsey and I’m sure we’ll get into kind of the steps of how we got out of debt, and that was very influential and we followed that to a T. But Joe, he — I tell you what, Tim, I mean, he cares about students and he cared about me and he still checks in with me from time to time. You know how you can sort emails on your phone or on your computer?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Levi Ellison: And I’ve got a separate little inbox for him and so I can read through all his financial stuff that he sends out, updates and things to do and not to do and just staying engaged with money. And it’s not like something that you read 24/7, but as long as you’re staying up-to-date on stuff, you can really make big differences. And we did, anyway. Yeah, love Joe.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. I sense he’s a great teacher and he’s actually working on a book right now and as I’m reading through it, I feel like it’s just spewing with wisdom of multiple years of experience and his teachings to many students along the way. One of the things you said in the email that you and I had connected prior to the interview was the impact of learning things like Time Value of Money and other things. And so I think this is again just a great reminder for students listening, if you have that opportunity like an elective if you’re in college, taking advantage of that. I think it just brings the topic front and center and develops that passion hopefully towards learning. But if not, going out there and finding it. You know, podcasts, blogs, sites that are out there, courses that are out there that can help you learn more about this. So let’s get into the x’s and the o’s. So I’m going to break down the numbers again of what you guys were working with. Total debt load — or excuse me — a total payoff of $214,594.55, but who’s counting, right, with the $.55?

Levi Ellison: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: And if we average that out a little bit more about $151,000 per year, a little over $12,600 per month, $2,900 per week, over $400 per day. That per day is the one that my gosh, when you see that number, you’re like, holy cow.

Levi Ellison: Yeah, that floored both of us because we didn’t realize because you don’t write that check every day.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Levi Ellison: We wrote it every two weeks when we got paid.

Tim Ulbrich: So as I alluded to already, I see that number, $12,600 per month. Even on two pharmacists’ salary, that is incredible. There is only so much take-home pay to work with. So talk us through how you did it. It sounds like the baby steps were a big part of this. But even more details about the budget and kind of how you and Jessica worked together, really each and every month, and I’m sure it was even more often than that.

Levi Ellison: Sure. So I think budget is the key as far as how we were able to do it. More importantly when you get into kind of the nitty-gritty of how we budgeted, is we learned something called an allocated spending plan. And so every two weeks, I have a little Excel chart. I’m a big nerd, so I love looking at this thing. We, you know, just put the money in our checking account in the top line and then we subtracted everything else that was essential, you know, from electric bill, water bill, all your normal stuff, wherever your money’s going to go for the next two weeks. And then whatever money was left over, we immediately, as soon as that hit our checking account, we would put it towards the loan because we knew every day that was passing was about $30 in interest being added. And so if you do it one day sooner, you save $30. I mean, it’s not a full $30 because you’re not getting it all, but that mindset. And so that was how we did it is we just, we said these things are what we have to have. And I can tell you, Tim, over the course of those 17 months, we can count on one hand how many times we ate out on our dime. Our parents took us from time to time, her family would take us, mine would, you know, that sort of thing. But as far as just going even fast food, no. We planned very carefully. I can remember — and we bought a few things that we had to have or at least we thought we did like Jessica’s phone broke, so we went to the AT&T store and I can remember it’s about an 80-mile drive from where we are out in rural Arkansas. And we get there to the AT&T store and we’re like, should we eat lunch before we go in or after? We’re like, well, the food will probably get hot because it’s in the car in our lunch boxes. And so we’re sitting there, eating a sandwich in the AT&T store. We’re like, this is going to be worth it.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Levi Ellison: And I can tell you, it is so worth it now. We look back on that, we laugh, like that was so funny. And now when we go there for traveling, we can go out to eat and have all the chips and salsa we want, you know.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s right.

Levi Ellison: It’s fun.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think there’s something fun about the journey, right? I’m sure for you and Jessica, that brought you guys together in a different way and obviously I can tell just as I hear you talking, you’re reflecting on that together. It was something you accomplished together, and I think that’s a piece we don’t talk enough about is you know, from a marriage standpoint, two people working on something like that and making some sacrifices and working together, that has long, long-term effects, you know, obviously for the good. So I think that’s worth noting as well. Talk to me more about the budget. I’m guessing — I’m wondering, I’m guessing our listeners are wondering as well, it sounds like more of a zero-based budget kind of model.

Levi Ellison: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: Accounting for every single dollar that you’re earning each and every month. You talked about an Excel spreadsheet.

Levi Ellison: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: So was this something that you were leading the charge on? You guys were working together? Was it just staying in Excel? Were you utilizing any apps or tools to help you along that process?

Levi Ellison: Oh, those are all good questions. So we used EveryDollar, Dave Ramsey’s budgeting app. And we had the Premium version, and so it would sync with our phones as far as our — of course, we don’t have any credit cards. But it syncs with our debit cards and we could keep track of every single dollar that came out and came in. And that was kind of the goal for the month. And it gets a little confusing. Anybody that’s ever done a budget, you’re like, well, I still have money left over at the end of the month and I haven’t gotten paid yet for the next month. And so like if you’re sitting here, we’re recording this in March and I’m not going to get paid until April such-and-such date or whatever, you’re like, well, how do I budget for that? Because I’ve already got the money in my account, and so that’s where the allocated spending plan really came into play. And so we were on a two-week budget, even if we have goals for the monthly budget and we can throw that into that allocated spending plan, we can just say, OK, let’s spend a couple hundred dollars on clothes this month because we can now or whatever it is. And you take that and say, we’re going to spend it on this check here or you can do it over the course of a couple ones. And so that’s how we managed to keep track of everything. And as far as us doing it together, it was me doing the math and doing all the charts and stuff for the most part. But what I never did was make that finalized. We would come in together for sure every two weeks, and she would look at it and say, OK, I like this, don’t like this, and she would change a few things. But I’d have it ready for her to look at — at least I would try to. It doesn’t always work out perfectly.

Tim Ulbrich: So to that point, I mean, obviously to be able to pay off more than $200,000 in a very short period of time, two people have to be on the same page.

Levi Ellison: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: But you know, I’m guessing that that doesn’t necessarily mean it was always perfect. Maybe it was.

Levi Ellison: No.

Tim Ulbrich: What was — yeah, what were some of those challenges? And for those that are listening that, you know, may be of a more extreme situation where instead of just a challenge here or there, it’s two people that philosophically — you know, maybe they don’t agree on the goals or the intensity of it. Any words of wisdom there you can share about either challenges you all had or words of advice for others?

Levi Ellison: I don’t think you could have asked a better question. So for two people to be married, you have to be on the same page about money. I don’t know how you couldn’t be. And so this is not something that I just sprung on our honeymoon. We had talked about this beforehand as part of our premarital counseling. And so we were on the same page. And so one thing about us as far as motivation and why would you be so intense about this is we want to be good stewards of what we’ve been given. And so to understand our worldview or our framework that we work in, we’re Christians, and so we’re very involved in our local church. And so along the way, I think this is important for your listeners — we weren’t misers, we gave 10% of our gross income. And so if you factor that in to —

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Levi Ellison: — how much money we paid back on loans, we could have been out of debt a lot sooner. But we also lived a lot cheaper than some of your listeners are probably thinking, now realizing that we factor in that we make average pharmacist salaries, $120,000-130,000 a year and there’s two of us. And we tithe 10% of that. We gave a lot of money to the church, and that’s not a bragging issue, but it’s something we believed in. And so that’s one of the reasons why we did this so quickly and aggressively and we were on the same page is because we both had the same faith and we both are on the same page about money, and we knew that we wanted to do this. And you’re right about strengthening marriage to go back to the previous question is it surely did. When we look at stuff now, we say, “Yeah, we could do that. That won’t be a problem.” Like we know we can. We’ve done a lot harder stuff together.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think it goes back to you guys had that common thread, you had that common viewpoint, which even if there were moments of maybe month-to-month, you didn’t see eye-to-eye on everything, obviously in a short period of time, you did see eye-to-eye on a lot. But nonetheless, you still had that common lens in which you’re working from. And we always talk about I think the importance of starting with the goal, starting with the why, and then getting into the nitty gritty of the budget because if you can agree on the philosophy, if you can agree on the direction, it’s much easier to agree on OK, in light of the philosophy, let’s talk about this one expense or this one issue.

Levi Ellison: If there’s no why, you’re never going to get to the what of driving a beater.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Levi Ellison: And I don’t really consider our cars beaters, but they’re probably worth about $3,000 apiece. And they run just fine. They don’t break down. They’re just little cars, and they do great.

Tim Ulbrich: So speaking of cars, a famous Joe Baker quote, there is not a parade watching you on the way to work.

Levi Ellison: Yes, I love that.

Tim Ulbrich: Which takes me to, you know, this concept of what decisions you guys made in terms of things to forego as you’re talking about making massive student loan payments or $12,600 a month, you’re talking about tithing, giving 10% of gross income throughout this, obviously you had to give up on some things, car being one I’m assuming. But home, other things, talk us through what were the areas that you decided not to spend money on that, you know, might have been difficult as you think about some of the challenges with kind of the peer comparison and keeping up with the Joneses.

Levi Ellison: Yeah. So I guess you could say we gave up on the car, you’re right about that. I’d love to be driving a brand new GMC Sierra. I would love it. But I’m not, and that’s OK. We’re going to pay cash for something like that one day or a slightly used one. And that’s fine because Joe Baker is 100% right. If you can get in the mindset of there’s not a parade watching you go to work, it doesn’t matter. And it’s kind of funny, people notice. One of my coworkers, one of the techs, her daughter asked her, said, “Why is Levi still driving that?” And she was sharing that with me, and it just made me laugh. Like they don’t get it. But you can share with them, say, “There’s a whole goal behind this. We want to be debt-free.” So that was one of the things that we gave up was car. As far as our housing situation, we haven’t bought a home yet. We’re renting, but we’re in a very good, quiet neighborhood. I love running, and so the streets are great for that, very little traffic. So I don’t really feel like we gave up much there. We’re living in a lot better place than the apartments that we both lived in Little Rock over the course of pharmacy school. You know, we have a backyard, a place for our dog, stuff like that. So we gave up a little. We don’t have a tremendous mountain view, we’re kind of in the mountains over here in Western Arkansas, and we look forward to that very soon. That’s one of the things that we’re saving for now. But I don’t feel like we gave up just a whole lot. We just didn’t have extensive dates.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Levi Ellison: I was talking to my wife and said, “Do you want to share anything about that from your perspective on the show tomorrow morning?” And she said, “Well, we didn’t spend any money on dates.” I said, “That’s not true. I went to Redbox multiple times. I remember that $1.75.”

Tim Ulbrich: I was going to say, it started as a dollar, now it’s $1.75, right? So yeah. But there’s creativity there, right? I mean, again, those are moments that are created together. And I think I want to reiterate some of what you said. I mean, you know, used cars, renting, I think those are probably — if I had to pick two areas, no judgement here, but two areas that I would say often get in the way of being able to achieve other goals, here whether it is student loan repayment, but it could be any other goal, saving for retirement, saving for kids’ college, being able to give whatever, I would say it’s often the home and the car. And I think it’s shifting perspective that renting is not a bad thing. Renting is not evil, you know. You’re not necessarily just throwing money down the drain, and we talked about that on a previous episode with Nate Hedrick and really running the numbers objectively. And used cars, I mean, I think really changing your perspective on Point A to Point B, and one of the best things I heard on this was Ramit Sethi, who wrote a book, “I Will Teach You to Be Rich.” He talks about this concept of money dials. And identifying the things that mean most to you and align with your why and dialing those up. So let’s say for you and your wife Jessica, maybe it’s shared experiences together now that you guys have obviously a little bit more margin, spending money on that, not being afraid to spend money on that if that’s what means most to you. But if a car doesn’t mean a whole lot to you, then dial it down. Like you know what I mean? And find those things that really aren’t that important at the end of the day to you and really challenging yourself to think through those, each of those individually. So what do you say in response to, you know, some of the typical objections to the Dave Ramsey baby steps, right? So things like, you know, often only having $1,000 in emergency fund until you’re fully out of debt, and is that realistic, is that prudent. is that wise, you know, not to have a full 3-6 months? Or not establishing credit or building credit? Delaying retirement savings, perhaps? So what do you say? And I know your journey’s a little bit different because it was a shorter time period of 17 months, and I think where some of those challenges come in, especially on delayed retirement and emergency savings, is when you’re stretching it out say 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 15 years. But talk to us through how you all reconciled that that was the method, the steps, the path that was best for you and your plan.

Levi Ellison: I would say first off, if you’re going to follow the Dave Ramsey plan, you can’t be Dave-ish. You have to either do it or don’t. And so we decided we were going to do it, and we were going to be gazelle-intense, as he likes to say. We’re running away on the plain from the cheetah, and we’re going to make it. And so we did. And as far as like the emergency fund, that’s a temporary emergency fund of $1,000. We now have 6 months of expenses and with a very real coronavirus running around right now, that makes us feel better. I mean, it truly does. And so to have to owe no debt to anybody and to be as prepared as you can be for a crisis like this or a pandemic to not want to be fear-mongering, but we feel good about that piece of our plan. And pausing retirement for 17 months, I mean, the stock market just lost the biggest loss in 30 years. I guess I think we’re OK for now. You know, it’s not like we’re not going to buy a house. It’s not like we’re not going to ever fully fund our emergency fund, those types of things. It’s quick. I mean, if you’re going to do it, you need to do it. And so for us, we knew each other well enough, we were in the same study group, we were very good friends before we got married or even started dating. And so I knew her, she knew me, we both knew if we said we were going to do something, we were going to do it. And so we just had that resolve. That’s kind of the way it went for us. But as far as like credit goes, we have a goal of having no credit. And that may sound crazy to a lot of people, but you actually don’t need it. I went down to my local bank, said, “Hey, is this going to be a problem if we have no credit?” And they said, “No.” And so it’s almost laughable how the way people think that you have to have a credit score. You don’t. I’ve rented plenty of cars without a credit card. I’ve done all the things that you need to do. I’ve booked a $12,000 cruise celebrating getting out of debt, and it got canceled because it was the Grand Princess that was quarantined off the coast of California.

Tim Ulbrich: Oh my gosh.

Levi Ellison: Right. Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: Oh my gosh.

Levi Ellison: So there’s that. And that’s not a laughing matter, it’s a very serious thing.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Levi Ellison: They’re going to reimburse us. We’re still waiting to hear back from flights, and so one thing I would change about my financial plan is buying insurance on flights.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Levi Ellison: I’ve never done that before, but I will be in the future because you never know what’s happening.

Tim Ulbrich: Although what are the chances of something like COVID-19, right?

Levi Ellison: Right, right, yeah. That’s what I said.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. So one of the things too that I heard there and I think often doesn’t get talked about, whether it’s the Ramsey framework or something like the Compass Money Map framework or another framework, I think a framework is very helpful, especially when you have multiple competing priorities that you’re trying to work through, debt repayment, retirement savings, emergency funds, and you’re looking at a way for two people to get on the same page. I think sometimes it’s a little bit more difficult if it’s one person’s idea and I want this other person to implement it, but I think sometimes a framework is a nice third party that gives you both an idea of something you can work towards together and hopefully have those shared goals. Last question I have for you is here you are now on the backside of this, and I think we often don’t talk about life after paying off debt. And what was $12,600 a month going towards student loans is no longer is no longer going towards student loans.

Levi Ellison: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: So what is the game plan now? What are the goals? And how have you adjusted to loosen up some of those things like hey, it’s OK to go out to eat, you know, every once in awhile, and it’s OK to enjoy those things. So talk to us a little bit about life after having the debt paid off.

Levi Ellison: Right, so this is a whole goal, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Levi Ellison: You don’t want to live below the federal poverty limit for 17 months and continue that until I retire. It’s not — that wasn’t the plan, so it’s exciting to be here and to like the cruise thing, we were spending $12,000 a month on loans and repaying that. We can book a $12,000 cruise, and it was going to be a really nice one, 11 days.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, yep.

Levi Ellison: And those things will work out in the future, and so we plan to take some trips. We want to go to Washington, D.C., want to tour the Capitol, do all the things that we wanted to do while we were in debt. And things, as far as having a framework, you are nailing it there. It is so important to have a plan. And so what we decided to do was to come up with like an annual budget. I know that sounds a little crazy for a household, but we have a year’s worth of plans and just kind of rough estimates, this isn’t as intense as our allocated spending plan as far as I know where every single penny is going. But we have plans in place to get us both vehicles, to have a certain amount of money in place to put a down payment on a home if we don’t end up paying cash for a home, which we might do. It depends on some different circumstances here at home, but having that annual plan in place I think is really going to help us, it’s already informing our decisions as far as when we get this money back from the cruise, what are we going to do with that, are we just going to go blow it anyway because it’s like it’s already gone or are we going to put and speed up the plan as far as well, if we go ahead and do this, we can get me a truck before summer, we can get her an SUV or whatever we want to do, which is a much more fun conversation than, ‘OK, it’s Friday again. Man, was that only two weeks ago that we paid $6,000? OK, here we go again.’

Tim Ulbrich: Another Redbox.

Levi Ellison: Push submit. Yeah, again at Redbox this week, that sort of thing. So it’s exciting to be able to talk about what we’re going to do with it versus we know exactly what we’re going to do with it.

Tim Ulbrich: And you know what I love, Levi, I know my wife Jess and I felt this, I sense the same for you and also a Jess is that when you are so used to grinding it out, I mean, $12,600 a month, for a 17-month period, it’s hard to measure, but there is such a long-term benefit of that beyond the 17 months. You know, yes, you’re going to loosen up the reins, yes, that’s OK, you guys should do that, you should enjoy it. And there’s balance and all that. But you’ve shifted that perspective on what really is important and where happiness does and does not come from. And I think that has such a long-term benefit beyond that 17-month period of how you’re utilizing your money. And I love that for you guys, I know you guys are teaching some of this now with Financial Peace, obviously giving is still a priority and really giving back and sharing some of that as you are doing here on the podcast as well. So really excited to see where this goes for you all and the impact you’re able to have on others because of obviously the margin that you have now to work with and the ability to share that. So thank you for coming on the show, thank you for taking time to share your journey. Congratulations. It’s really, really an incredible journey. And excited that you were willing to come on and share it with our community.

Levi Ellison: You’re very welcome. I enjoyed it.

Tim Ulbrich: Thank you.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 143: How Using Your Creativity Can Spark a Six-Figure Business


How Using Your Creativity Can Spark a Six-Figure Business: Art by Stephanie Roberts

Stephanie Roberts, PharmD joins Tim Church to share how she went from full-time pharmacist to full-time mixed media artist after an Instagram influencer shared her pill petri art and made it go viral.

About Today’s Guest

Stephanie grew up in the hills of Eastern Kentucky, a small rural town named Prestonsburg with less than 5,000 people. From as early as she can remember, her go-to response to “What do you want to be when you grow up?” was to be an artist. Growing up as a straight A, high achieving student, there wasn’t a terrible amount of encouragement to follow your dreams if our dreams were outside the tidy box of medical field/law/etc. Stephanie learned to think like most adults surrounding her that being an artist wasn’t a “real job” or career and never thought much of it past elementary school. Art has never left her though and even as she studied and made her way through undergrad (Georgetown College) and then into pharmacy school (University of Appalachia), she was always making and painting as a creative outlet.

After graduation, Stephanie managed a couple different retail chains for a few years (PIC at CVS and Meijer), and finally landed an amazing opportunity as staff pharmacist at the University of Kentucky, opening a new retail location for them in their newest pavilion on the medical campus. At this point she had been out of school for 4 years, married with a one-year old and art was mostly a distant memory. A few years into her new position, she leaped at the opportunity when a 30 hour / 3 days a week (still considered “full-time” for benefits purposes) was offered to her, within the same pharmacy. The extra days off gave her more time with my children (up to 2 boys at this point!) and time to take up a small amount of creativity again.

The work was enough to take up every minute of her spare time but still, she was only dreaming of making art her full-time job. Until July 2019 when her resin coasters with medications suspended inside — what she has named “pill petri” — went viral. This whacky combo she created on a whim combining her love of epoxy resin and her career in medicine, became the tipping point that truly began a whole new life for her. The business was more than she could handle and she worked literally all day and night. Stephanie hired help, all either technicians or interns from her pharmacy, and together they fulfilled orders. She started an online shop that she would stock with hundreds of coasters just for it to sell out within 2 minutes with each release. After the most exhausting 2 months of her life working 2 full-time jobs, she finally took the leap and became a full-time artist still working 1 day each week in the same pharmacy. While the income from art has far surpassed her pharmacy salary, she continues to work to retain her pharmacy knowledge and stay fresh in the profession.

Summary

Stephanie Roberts joins Tim Church on this week’s podcast episode to talk about her amazing transition from full-time pharmacist to full-time artist. Stephanie always loved art growing up and kept creating during college as a hobby. After graduation Stephanie started working with CVS, became manager and then got her own store. After that, she worked at a Meijer in her town and then decided to work at a new pharmacy at University of Kentucky hospital which she absolutely loves.

Three years ago, Stephanie started taking interest in different artists she likes and felt inspired to create more, so she did. Working with epoxy resin was really popular and she was interested in it, so she dove in, researched different techniques and started to create art pieces. She posted pictures of the pieces she made on Instagram but never put a price on them and finally decided to one day. When she did, it sold within 10 minutes. At the end of 2018, she started to make pill petri dish coasters and sell them on Instagram. In July 2019, a very popular Instagram account (@things.i.bought.and.liked) shared the pill petri coasters Stephanie makes and it made her go viral and ultimately changed her life. She had hundreds of orders come in and she couldn’t take all of them. A month after, she spoke with her pharmacy manager about going down to one day a week so she could focus on her art business.

Now, Stepanie earns more money with her art business than she would with a full-time pharmacist salary. She makes different art pieces like wall panel geodes, ocean pieces, pill petri coasters and has a commission list several months out. Every Sunday at 9 pm she opens her shop. No matter how much she lists, Stephanie sells out in two minutes.

Stephanie has brought in help from people in her pharmacy circle to aid her in making the pill petri coasters, her most popular piece. She hopes to hire a full-time employee in the future and loves that she’s able to spend more time with her three children, have a flexible schedule and do something she truly loves.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Church: Stephanie, thanks so much for stopping by and being part of this side hustle edition.

Stephanie Roberts: I am super excited to be here. Thanks so much for having me.

Tim Church: Well, shoutout to my wife for kind of getting this episode started because she reached out to me probably about a month or so ago from the time of recording this and said, “Hey, do you know who this Stephanie person is? She’s got some really cool art, and she’s a pharmacist. And I actually have one of her pieces of artwork as my cell phone background. And I think you should reach out.”

Stephanie Roberts: That is crazy. It doesn’t surprise me, but you didn’t tell me that ahead of time because, I mean, I think most of my audience is women. And I have men messaging me saying, “My wife really wants your art. Can I get it for a surprise for her?” So I feel like it comes from the females. So that’s really funny you said that.

Tim Church: That’s so cool. Well, I can’t wait to dig into the art and all the things that you’re doing in addition to pharmacy. But I want to start out with a couple icebreakers because I think it would be fun. So Stephanie, you have to sing karaoke. What song are you picking?

Stephanie Roberts: Probably anything Reba McIntyre. I think you can hear the southern accent in there, but I love me some Reba.

Tim Church: OK. And what’s — any specific one?

Stephanie Roberts: Probably “Fancy.”

Tim Church: OK.

Stephanie Roberts: I don’t know if you even know Reba, but —

Tim Church: Oh, I know Reba.

Stephanie Roberts: Right. I mean, and I’m not a big country listener. But I mean, I’ve loved Reba from the time I was little. And I have the red hair and everything, so it works.

Tim Church: Now, I did pick up the southern accent a little bit. Where are you from?

Stephanie Roberts: Kentucky. From eastern Kentucky, from the mountains. And I’m central Kentucky now. But the accent is still with me.

Tim Church: Oh, cool. Alright, I’ve got one more for you. You have to delete all but three apps from your phone. Which ones are you keeping?

Stephanie Roberts: Well, I have to keep Instagram because that’s my bread and butter. Let’s see, what else do I really use? Don’t care much for Facebook, but I guess I do still use it. And then a photo editing, again, that’s a big — I have so many photo apps, I don’t know if I could choose one. But that’s big for me and the business.

Tim Church: Cool. Well I like that. And I knew Instagram was going to be one of them, but I was curious what the others are going to be. Maybe your email, right, so you can still communicate with people that want to order?

Stephanie Roberts: Oh, I don’t know. It’s good and bad. The email folders are full, the DMs are full on Instagram. I can’t say I’m doing great at the communication. But I’m grateful for it. But yeah, I’m not too great at it.

Tim Church: Well, I want to start out with you talking about your career path as a pharmacist because obviously this show is about side hustles and how you’ve been able to grow a business. But obviously, that was not where you started. You started out as a pharmacist. So I want to hear about that.

Stephanie Roberts: Oh, OK. Well, so not the most interesting career path, but I always knew I would be in retail pharmacy. So before I had even graduated pharmacy school, I had done an interview with CVS. And they hired me on the spot. And that just seemed like a great, you know, right-out-of-school job for me. I don’t think I had planned too much into where I wanted to be, which is great if you don’t have big expectations, then you won’t get let down. So I started with CVS and quickly became manager with CVS. I floated around and then I got my own store. And from there, that was still — it was a big commute for me. I was commuting about one and a half hours, so that was pretty exhausting when you drive an hour and a half and you have a 14-hour day and you drive an hour and a half back and then you do it again the next day. So another grocery store pharmacy that was in my actual town in Lexington, Kentucky, called me because they were looking for a manager that already had experience. And so I snapped up working at Myer because that was in town where I actually lived. And so I was with Myer for a period of time and then I had a customer that would come in all the time, and he was kind of a retired pharmacist. He had worked with Eli Lilly in Indianapolis, and he was getting his license in Kentucky. He didn’t really love it; he didn’t want to, but his wife was urging him to just so he could work part-time with the University of Kentucky. And that’s where his wife was a pharmacist too. Hey Jeff, if you’re listening. And he told me they were opening a new pharmacy. And I mean, he was just — he was so nice. I wasn’t even looking for another job, but he was like, “You really, really should look into it.” So I did, and I’ve been at UK ever since. It’s retail pharmacy, but it is completely different than what most people think of retail pharmacy. And it’s been awesome. I mean, I’ve said many times, if we ever moved out, I could never do old-school retail pharmacy ever again. It’s, you know, it sometimes can be the worst of the worst. But at UK, we do a lot for the employees and stuff but mostly with the inpatient, we have a program called Meds to Beds that delivers all the medications to the patients before they’re leaving, we service a lot of our transplant patients, we continue to do their medications through mail order, we have a specialty pharmacy. It’s just — and importantly, no drive through, which is a big win for retail pharmacy. But it’s so interesting. No day is ever the same as the last. It’s just — it’s really cool. It’s been eye-opening. I’ve learned a lot. I mean, I’ve learned about medications that are probably learned about in pharmacy school, I don’t even remember, but I’ve had to relearn them because they are fast movers whereas you wouldn’t have even seen them in your normal or average retail pharmacy. So that’s where I still am today one day a week. And I really love it there. I love the people and I love the way they run their pharmacy. And they give you plenty of help. We have so many pharmacists and so many technicians working together. And it’s so great to be able to bounce off any questions, bounce them off another pharmacist or anything when you’re just unsure of something where I wasn’t used to having that before. So yeah, that’s where I am today.

Tim Church: Wow. It sounds like you’re in a much better environment and that you really have a positive working atmosphere with your colleagues and just the things that you’re able to do. What are some of the other things that you like about it compared to other traditional pharmacy models?

Stephanie Roberts: Kind of like what I said about we’re not traditional in the way that we don’t have the drive-through. We don’t have a lot of people coming — not a lot coming outside into our pharmacy as in like outside of the hospital because we’re doing a lot of discharges, a lot of the prescriptions for the patients inside plus the employees and their families. So we really get to know our patients. We don’t see a lot of drug-seeking behavior, which I saw a lot in retail pharmacy. You know, that was kind of a fear, sometimes a safety concern when you’re working until 10 at night and, you know, other pharmacies have been robbed or things just look suspicious in the store. And I don’t really have that fear at UK, kind of in the heart of the hospital and if you wanted to take something from the pharmacy, you’re going to kind of have a long run to get out and pass security into a waiting car. You know what I mean? So it’s — I love that for even safety concerns. We’ve become a 24/7 pharmacy now. That just started about a year ago. So if you even have to work overnight, it’s a great place to be. So in those terms, everything’s interesting, everything’s different. Interesting also means you have new sets of problems and things when it comes to mail order and maybe people didn’t ask for their medications in time, so you’re calling a courier to drive it to them across the state because you don’t want any of your organ transplants to lose their well-earned organ. But it’s always interesting. I just can’t even compare it to any retail pharmacy I had experience with before. It’s pretty cool.

Tim Church: Yeah, I mean, it sounds like a great place to be if you’re a pharmacist. And like you said, it’s not only — it’s challenging, but it’s interesting. And you’ve got a great support team to help you along the way. So I think that’s really cool. Now, people listening may have just picked that up and said, “Stephanie, how are you only working one day a week?” And obviously some people choose to work part-time and they choose to work as-needed, but you know, you’re working one a day a week. And obviously as we were talking about before the podcast started that that’s not how it always was. So let’s jump into how Art by Stephanie got started because obviously that’s part of the story and how you’re working one day a week.

Stephanie Roberts: Right. And it seems kind of counterintuitive when I say I’ve got this wonderful job and now it’s, you know, down to one day a week by choice because I’ve decided to do something else. But I really loved it if I was going to do pharmacy full-time forever. And who knows? One day I might go back to full-time. But that’s where I would want to be. But the art kind of fell into my lap. So I’ve always loved art since I was a little girl, that was always my go-to when somebody asked me what I wanted to be, it was going to be an artist. But you know, as you grow up, not usually — people don’t usually encourage that as a career because let’s get real, there’s not a lot of artists we know that are doing it as a full-time career and paying all the bills. I’m not trying to say I’m special in any way, but you know, it’s not something parents usually encourage their kids to do. I have awesome parents, wonderful parents. So I’ve always done it as a hobby on the side, kind of always did it through undergraduate. As I became a pharmacist, it was something that was probably let go of for a few years. I got married, graduated from pharmacy school the next year, a few years later we had our first of three kids, and so you know, life was pretty busy. And probably about three years ago, I think through Instagram and YouTube and things like that, I started really taking interest in some artists that I love. I think Justin Gaffrey is one of my first artists I ever just like fell in love with his paintings. They’re really textured, and I’m just a texture lover. I love when paintings or art just like jump off the canvas. So I really loved Justin Gaffrey. A few others that I just watched and realized they were — they had a career. I mean, they were doing great. And a lot of their interest was through Instagram. And not that even in my head at that point was I saying, oh, I could become an artist one day. It’s just like I felt inspired to create. So I did. And I would share pictures. And still, I wasn’t trying to go after anything. I was just enjoying it and it was a great creative outlet. So I did that for a few years. It really started with paintings at first. And then I think epoxy resin kind of just like hit the art scene and everybody just started getting resin and I was really interested in that. So I started resin work and kind of 50-50 between painting and resin work. And one day, I just decided after a few years of this and just posting pictures, never trying to get sales, not pushing anything, I just wanted to create and share what I was doing, I decided to put a price in the text of the picture on Instagram, just wondering, you know, I feel awkward asking somebody how much something is. So maybe other people feel awkward too. You know? You’re afraid to get that answer, “Oh, it’s $10,000,” and you’re like, oh, that’s not in my price range. I mean, I just don’t even think I could ask another artist. It’s crazy sometimes. So that’s why I thought I’ll put a price on this and see if anybody’s interested. And it sold within five or 10 minutes. And I was like, well, that was really cool. So I just continued to do that. And I think that was one of my — it was a resin piece and I called it geode, and it’s like an art panel, and it’s stained glass and it’s resin and it’s different pigments and metallics and things like that. And so it was a geode.

Tim Church: And how much was your first piece that you sold on Instagram? How much did you sell it for?

Stephanie Roberts: It was $150.

Tim Church: $150. And how much did that first piece, like in terms of the materials, how much did it cost you to build that particular piece? And then how long did it take you to make it?

Stephanie Roberts: I would say in material cost, probably under $40. I’m thinking as for time, it probably took me five or six hours because it was one of my first ones I had ever made, so everything was troubleshooting and figuring out how to do this and that, which is something I can do a lot quicker after, you know, 100 of those at this point. But yeah. So I really wasn’t doing a cost analysis on my hourly wage or anything like that. I just thought there’s nobody that’s going to want to spend more than $150 probably. Nobody is even going to want to spend $150. That’s what I’m going to price it at because I was happy to keep it. And if nobody wanted it, I was happy to keep it. So yeah, that probably wasn’t my best cost analysis. But it was still great. It was still a profit, and it kind of went on from there.

Tim Church: I mean, that’s really exciting. So what’s going through your head, though, either in the moments before you put it up to say you’re putting it up for sale or even the week or the month before you decided to do that. What’s going through your mind?

Stephanie Roberts: You could probably ask my husband because I talk a lot, but he’s probably not listening. But I mean, at that point, I was like this is really cool. I could make more of these and I could do this and if I had so many a week, it would equal this. You know, it’s probably like, OK sure, but how many people are going to buy these? But you know, in my head I was just like, I’m going to make more and I’m going to put more price on them. I’m going to see if people want to commission these. Still not in the frame of mind like oh, this is going to be a full-time career. But a side hustle, yes. Did I need a side hustle? No. But I was, you know, I loved what I was doing. And if people were going to pay me to do it, that’s all the better reason why I would do it and, you know, not be helping with cooking or cleaning in the house or something. You know, it gives you more reason to do this hobby when you’re getting paid for it. You feel a little bit better about spending your time on it. So yeah, it wasn’t much later — I think that was about like October of that year. And this was 2018. And by November or December, I had made what I went viral for is the pill petri, which is on coasters, resin coasters, with over-the-counter medications in them. And I had put those — I just shared a picture of them on a pharmacy moms group, and I got more orders than I could handle. You know?

Tim Church: Wow.

Stephanie Roberts: It was kind of near Christmastime and everybody wanted them either for themselves or for a friend. And I mean, I’m not saying it was a million orders by any means, but I wasn’t prepared to even make 50 at a time at that point. And you know, maybe I had an order for 100. So that was pretty cool.

Tim Church: That had to been awesome to really validate that what you were doing was something that was very desirable that people wanted.

Stephanie Roberts: Yeah. It was really exciting. I mean, I still, still didn’t — I was not in the frame of mind that this was going to go anywhere, that I would keep creating and I would probably still sell on the side always, maybe people would ask me to do commissions and different work, and I was happy to do it. But it was a dream. Sure, you could ask me, “Would you want to do this full-time?” Yes. But I mean, that was a big dream. It didn’t feel like reality that that could happen.

Tim Church: Do you think that because you just focused on the art and using it as a creative outlet, something that you enjoy doing without the initial intention of monetizing, do you think that that mindset has eventually helped you along the way as to where you are now in terms of making, actually earning income from it?

Stephanie Roberts: Oh yeah. 100%. I don’t think I could have started out saying, “I want to do this for money,” and went anywhere with it. It was because I loved it, it was a passion, I was learning from other artists on the Internet and wanting to do what they did. You know, different techniques and stuff. And I mean, I worked on a lot of things that just went straight into the garbage. You know? It was just for fun. Yeah, I don’t — if I had started out this was all about money and this was all, you know, I don’t think I would have went anywhere with it.

Tim Church: So talk a little bit about what the actual products that you’re selling, you went into it a little bit with the petri dishes, but obviously we’re on a podcast so need to be as descriptive as possible. We’ll definitely share some pictures once this gets posted. But can you talk a little bit about what you’re actually creating? What’s selling the most? What’s the most popular?

Stephanie Roberts: Yeah, sure. So probably earlier — this timeframe that we’re talking about, it was earlier that summer I was working with the epoxy resin, which is a liquid that you mix and then you pour and then it cures to a hard clear kind of glass-like or acrylic end result. And being the dork that I am, I had some pills around, over-the-counter medicines, and I was like, wouldn’t this be so funny? So I put the medications into — it’s a silicone mold that you put your resin into if you’re using a mold. And I made a coaster out of them. It’s like a 4-inch diameter coaster, and it just looks like the pills are suspended in the resin. It takes a few layers to do this. So I had made that that summer, I posted pictures of it. Again, I wasn’t doing any prices back then, so it’s not like anybody even asked about, “Hey, can I buy this?” And it was later that year that — I don’t even remember, I don’t know what the genesis of it was, why I decided hey, I should make a bunch of these. But for some reason, maybe it was just being in that pharmacist moms group, I thought, this could be something that other dorks like me — and I’m just kidding — but you know, other pharmacy nerds might like too. So you know, I put it out there, this is what I’m doing if anybody would like it. And it was very well received. So those are kind of like coasters, like I said, and then I make a little bigger 6-inch diameter. It came about several months later, and I put letters and words and funny quotes in those. And I put funny quotes in the coasters now too. So a lot of customers will — especially in the beginning when I had more time to take requests, they would request, “Hey, could you do this with pink? Can you do this with black? Can you do it with glitter?” And I was happy to do anything anybody asked for. And then every time I would post a picture, there would be 300 other people that agreed with that person, man, we really want them in that color too. And it always led to a new variation of what we call the pill petri. And so now there’s maybe four or five different colors or glitters or clear, whatever, pill petris that I do. And somebody’s always asking for something different. But besides just the pill petri, I still do what I call the geodes, which are wall panels that you put on the wall and those are the resin and the stained glass and the crystals. I do these ocean pieces. Some people send me shells that they’ve collected on family vacations, things like that, and I’ve included the shells in their ocean art. And again, that’s with resin. And then it looks really realistic and pretty cool, I think. But I’ve also done pill art that hangs on the wall as well. So I kind of jump all around, which is exactly what my ADD loves is doing a little bit of everything. And honestly, what I went viral for, the pill petri, can start to feel like a manufacturing process after a while. It doesn’t really get my creative juices flowing all the time, and while it’s my bread and butter, I really try to do some other things in between to really feel like I’m using my full potential, whatever that is. But yeah. A little bit of everything. I still paint, I still have requests for paintings. I have a commission list that’s into March at the moment for a wall art that’s not just the pill coasters that I get recognized the most for. But there’s still a lot of people requesting wall art of different kinds, whatever that may be, the geodes, the oceans, paintings, pill art. Yeah. It’s kind of wild.

Tim Church: Yeah. I was going to ask you, because I feel like every time I check out your Instagram profile — which is awesome, by the way — I mean, even if you’re not going to purchase anything, I think you need to just go and visit it because you’re going to have a lot of fun. And there’s so many cool designs that are on there, some of which appear to be edible. But they are not, correct?

Stephanie Roberts: Thank you, yes. Yeah, those would be the textured paintings that I love to do. And I use piping bags like you would if you were decorating a cake to make a lot of the ones that you’re talking about that edible with the flowers and things like that and pellet knives and things. But yeah, I just, I love art that looks like it’s just jumping off the wall.

Tim Church: But some of the petri dishes, they actually have real candy in there as part of the design, right?

Stephanie Roberts: Oh, yeah. Right. Yeah, no, I have the candy coasters and things too. And I’m even collaborating soon with a big sprinkle company because the sprinkles I think have been my favorite, which is kind of full circle in my life just because I’m addicted to sweets and sugar. I wish I wasn’t, but I am. And I grew up loving ice cream just covered with sprinkles, almost as many sprinkles as you had ice cream. And I would get gallons — I mean, just huge containers of it in my stocking for Christmas. That was like a gift my parents — I remember my grandmother giving me sprinkles as a gift. I mean, that was a gift that people would give me. I mean, that says you have an addiction, right there. But so it’s kind of cool that’s full circle that I’m doing the coasters with the sprinkles and other candy in them and things like that because truly, that’s just who I am, addicted to sugar. So that’s kind of fun for me too, just another side of my personality to be using in art as well.

Tim Church: So one of the things I noticed, I feel like every time I go to your profile and I go on your shopify, everything is sold out. So I was going to ask you, what’s going on with that?

Stephanie Roberts: Well, it’s really funny you say that. But I usually have a shop opening and I’ve kind of — it’s kind of become a Sunday tradition and I’ve kind of stuck with that Sunday, it kind of worked for me, at 9 p.m., I don’t know, it just worked out to be a good time. And no matter how much I put in the shop, it sells out in two minutes or less. And it’s crazy. But people still ask me like, can’t you just have your shop open all the time and just take orders all the time? Or somebody will say, “Can’t you get a real website?” And I’m just like, I don’t know what a real website is versus my shopify account, but it’s not going to increase how much product I have to sell, which I don’t think always registers with people. But if I just had it open to take, you know, requests too, I don’t know how to humbly say this, but I mean, it would be a year’s worth of orders because I can see how many people are on there at shop time when it opens versus how many people get an order through. And you know, they want to take preorders and things like that, and I don’t want for their safety and for mine, I don’t want to take preorders that are six months in advance, which some people say they’re willing to wait when you don’t know what could happen in life, happen to me, happen to my family, my house. I don’t want to hold your money in preorder status. So I like to just sell either what I have or what I can make within the week. And it seems to be working out really, really well. Right before Christmastime, about a month before Christmas, was my biggest preorder I ever did just so people would know whether they got an order in or if they should be shopping for something else if it was a gift for somebody. And that’s why I did it at that time. So it was in November, and I took how many orders I guesstimated I could do in the month before Christmas, and I was exhausted. And even then with to me, the huge amount that I put in the shop, it was still sold out in two minutes.

Tim Church: Wow.

Stephanie Roberts: So that’s just — it’s just — I mean, it’s crazy.

Tim Church: I mean, that’s incredible. That’s incredible. I was wondering if this was like a marketing tactic you were using. But it actually is the fact that you would be too overwhelmed with the amount of orders that’s coming through, which is — I think it’s a good problem to have, right?

Stephanie Roberts: Yeah. I never in 1 million years would I ever dream I had this problem. I mean, in my most earnest hopes and desires, I was like, oh, I think I could push out this many a week and that equates to this much money and that’s almost equal to pharmacy. And oh, we could cut back on things and I could become a full-time artist. I mean, never, ever, ever, ever, did I think this would be “a problem” that I would have that things would sell out. So and that — just to back up, I know I’m jumping everywhere. But last July, things changed when somebody on Instagram shared the art she had purchased. And her Instagram name is @thingsIboughtandliked. And when she bought it from me, I didn’t know who she was. But apparently she was the Oprah of Instagram. And when she shared — I mean, she only shares things that she purchased with her own money and she likes it. That’s the title of her Instagram, that’s exactly what she does. When she shared it, my life completely changed. That night, I had probably — oh gosh, I don’t know because I never did get through all the messages — like 400 or 500 messages. She shared about 9 p.m. my time. She’s in Texas. At 4 a.m., I decided to go to bed after answering as many messages as I could because I thought, well, this is the only rush I’ll ever get in my life. Like I better take every message and every order I could. But even by 4 a.m., I hadn’t got through even half of the orders. And so from her sharing that, I mean, thank God for her. That’s when life changed. So that was in July, and by maybe a month — not even a month later — I had talked to my manager about going down to one day a week and becoming a full-time artist. It was that life-changing. It was crazy.

Tim Church: Wow. So at that point when she shared that, how many hours were you working?

Stephanie Roberts: I was a 30-hour pharmacist at that point. So I was working three 10-hour days a week, which is amazing. And back when I took that — so when I started at UK, I was your regular 5 day a week, 40-hour person, kind of banker’s hours. And then a few years into it, they knew I was interested in going to 30 hours, which is still full-time benefits, and that’s what I took on. And at that point, I was doing some more art on the side, and it was like oh, this is great. I’ll have more time for art and just feeling like the human that I want to be, a little bit of everything. And if I’m going to be a good mom, obviously that was more time for kids too. So you know, it was — everything was great. But so I was 30 hours when she changed my life. And yeah. I realized burning the candle at both ends, I wasn’t sleeping, I was working around the clock to fulfill these orders, you know, it was — self-care didn’t happen for like four months. It was crazy. So I knew something had to end. Either I had to just give it up and I can’t be the person that can fulfill all these orders or I can, and I’ve got to let go of pharmacy, which was very scary when the whole family is on my insurance because the hospital has amazing insurance and benefits and things like that. And my husband has benefits, but you just can’t compare to how awesome the hospital benefits are. So it was scary, and it was something we had to weigh as a family and what we’re losing, what we’re gaining, pretty cool to be at home whenever the kids do need me because definitely the mom guilt has added up over the years. Every time they’re sick, my husband’s job is he has the best job ever and he’s flexible and he can be there for them. But man, it really hurts when you can’t be there when they’re sick. So now I can. I can be there for the kids and just so many other benefits. So that’s where we are. And I have the most supportive husband — this would never happen without the husband I have. Like I can imagine there’s a good percentage out there that would kind of be like, let it go, Stephanie. You know, you’ve got a great job — which I did. Pharmacy was great. Let’s count our blessings, let’s move on with what we have. But he’s been really supportive, and I’ve had some really pie in the sky dreams, and he’s just kind of like, go for it. I think you can do it. And without him, again, I just — without support, I don’t know how you could do it. So I’m thankful for that too. And he’s had to — when I was saying that I was burning the candle on both ends, I mean, he’s a wonderful father. But he really had to step up his game even more and really do a lot of the home things with the kids and everything it takes to run a family and a home. And he enabled me to be able to just devote everything I could to both jobs and stuff. So pretty awesome.

Tim Church: Yeah, I mean, that’s just wild how one post, and a bazillion orders come through and everything changes and no longer is pharmacy your full-time gig but now it becomes the other way around. And I think for a lot of people, that maybe they want to make that transition or do that change, but there’s obviously a lot of fear that goes behind that. Like you mentioned, obviously the healthcare benefits, that’s one, and being able to afford healthcare when that’s something that’s part of your employer benefit package. But then also, are you going to continue to get orders like that? Is it going to continue to have a demand? Or is it a one-time spurt like that? I think that probably had to be going through your mind at that time as you’re making that decision with your husband with how you’re going to proceed.

Stephanie Roberts: Oh yeah. I mean, looking back at it, I don’t really know how we made that decision. Why did we really think it would continue? I don’t know. I mean, there was kind of markers where you’d say, yeah, it looks like people will continue. But we didn’t know. This was only a few months later, but I still look back and think, why did we really think it was safe to make that jump? I don’t know, but thank God it was. And it’s continued to be — it probably took me 10 shop openings to be like, you know, every time before it opens, are people still going to be there? Are they still going to shop? Are they still going to buy things? And now I feel confident they’re going to be there because they’re in my DMs, they’re in my messages, they’re saying, “When is the next shop opening?” And I feel confident. And I might even feel confident like that it will continue for a year, but I don’t know what the future holds. I’m hopeful. But like I said before, and maybe this was while we weren’t recording, but you know, I hate to let go of pharmacy in case I need to get back into it. It’s an amazing safety net. I can’t think of a lot of people, you know, that I’ve learned about over the years, amazing authors and artists of every variation that have held onto their side job for as long as they could while they were still trying to make it. I don’t know of any side job that was as great as pharmacy is, so it was — I mean, I’m so happy that’s my safety net, even if I had to go back to the trenches of some retail pharmacy that I would prefer not to work in. It’s still a blessing, it’s still there, it’s still wonderful. So yeah. I just kind of pinch myself every day that this is happening.

Tim Church: I mean, it’s incredible. I mean, I just, I’m sitting here behind the mic like, I’m just so fascinated and intrigued with your story and how you made that jump but also how you continue to make it happen and just the demand being there. I mean, it’s just wild. So I think a lot of people are probably thinking, alright, Stephanie, you basically said you’re crushing it right now. You can’t even hold your shop open for more than a couple minutes before you sell out of your business. Can you give us just an estimate — I mean, how much are you actually earning in the business? And is it comparable to what you were making full-time as a pharmacist?

Stephanie Roberts: I think my husband wishes I was a little bit better with numbers and keeping up with things like that, but Shopify and having that online presence has really helped me to see that and see my profits and, you know, tax season is going to be really interesting this year as we figure out what we’re doing with a new business. But after this year, hopefully we are more informed about everything we need to do better next year. But yeah, it’s doing better than pharmacy. I think I would have made that jump even if it was maybe doing a little bit less than pharmacy. I think we could have handled that in our finances. I have, again, my husband has a Master’s in business and education that I don’t even understand. But you know, so he’s wonderful to have around. I call him the CFO. But yeah, it’s doing better than pharmacy, which is a huge surprise. I would go ahead and estimate that it’s going to be over six figures this year. And I mean, that’s pretty cool. I don’t know that I could ask for more. So —

Tim Church: I mean, that’s incredible right there because I mean, I know there’s a lot of people that obviously are doing — designing art and doing creative works. And I think they dream of even getting remotely close to what you’re making. And so the fact that you’ve been able to do it and replicate the process and continue to have — there’s a need out there, obviously, for people that want your designs. I mean, that’s just incredible.

Stephanie Roberts: It is incredible because who would have even thought outside of the pharmacy network I was going to find an audience for pill petri? But I mean, it far surpasses just people in the medical field anymore. I mean, there’s all the nice, fancy blog influencers, I mean, Instagram influencers and things like that. Again, other people buy it and then share it. And it’s — I would have never imagined that somebody that wasn’t in pharmacy or medicine period would want these. So I mean, yeah, just crazy. And I feel humbled by it but also feel like gosh, I look at some people that are just so talented and I wonder if their sales are like this or they’re close to this and things like that. I don’t feel worthy of it. But it’s — I’m grateful. And it’s been a really fun ride. So yeah. I put my time in at least. I may not be as wonderfully talented as they are, but I have definitely worked my butt off. I can say that. I have put the time in for sure.

Tim Church: It’s easy to tell that. And like you said, coming from your initial motivations for even pursuing art were way beyond the ability to monetize it. So I mean, I think that’s really cool. Now obviously, you’re the secret sauce of the business and creating these awesome designs. But does anybody help you with different aspects of it?

Stephanie Roberts: I have been bringing in more people, and they are to help with it. Like I said, the coasters at this point are — it’s almost like manufacturing. We make hundreds a week, and it is probably more time-intensive than anybody ever assumes when it comes to how many layers of resin you pour and putting the pills in, creating the capsules we make with the glitter and the sprinkles inside, I mean, I have thousands of those we make. So it’s not just buying over-the-counter drugs, but it’s making the glitter capsules that are kind of, again, the secret sauce that people are just like, where do you buy those? We don’t buy them. We make them. So the people I have helping me, funny enough, are technicians I’ve recruited, interns I’ve recruited, and somebody just started for me recently as one of my fellow pharmacist’s daughters. So it’s been kept close to home. I hope to hire somebody really full-time and, you know, become more of an assistant. I always tell people when I say, “Do you want to come over and help?” I mean, obviously, they get reimbursed. But you know, it’s not the most fun. But you know, we try to make it fun. It’s just time-consuming and we listen to our podcasts and we watch TV on the iPad or do whatever. So we keep it as lively as we can. And it’s not boring. It’s not the most fun. But it’s, you know, it’s better than on your worst day in pharmacy for sure. You know, the days when insurance is down and you know the customers don’t understand that and somebody’s sick and the very worst days, you’re like, yeah, you know, at my worst I may be a little bit bored on some occasions. But yeah, it’s still pretty great. I like the day-to-day

Tim Church: What about an accountant or a lawyer to help with some of the legal issues with the business? Anything — any of those people supporting you?

Stephanie Roberts: Well, I don’t have a lawyer that I have kept on staff or anything like that. But in the beginning, before we jumped this as a full-time career, my husband said, “You really need to figure out if this is legal. Legal, legal, legal.” I had kind of already been doing it, but he’s just like, you can’t jump to this full-time — and I had researched it on my own as much as I could to make sure everything was OK. So I think I contacted three different pharmacy lawyers that I knew of. So they were pharmacists plus attorneys. And they were all gracious enough — I mean, just on a friend basis looking into it for me. And nobody could find any reason why this would be, you know, illegal. Again, they’re over-the-counter medications, there’s no prescription medications in there. People shouldn’t be able to get — I mean, to get into the resin to get into a medication, you would have to use a drill. And by the time you got down to the pill, it’s going to be obliterated. So you know, good luck trying to get that Tylenol out of there to take it, but I don’t think it’s going to hurt anybody.

Tim Church: I was going to go for the Sour Patch Kid or the Swedish fish.

Stephanie Roberts: Oh, OK. Yeah, I mean, just swallow the coaster whole. That would probably easier to do than to get down to those. And on the gummies too, I mean, I’ve covered those with like shellac-type substances. So yeah. You’re not going to want them. So definitely have an accountant that will be helping us with our first tax season as a sole proprietorship this year. Plan on becoming an LLC. Should have done that last year, but time definitely got away from me. LLC I think would be much more beneficial. But yes, an accountant is a must. I don’t think we would do this on our own. Not yet. Maybe in the future. Probably not. But — and I hope I never need a lawyer, other than the initial, “Hey, is this legal?” I hope I don’t need another one for any reason.

Tim Church: But one of the things along the lines I was going to ask was, do you have any patents or other protections on your designs?

Stephanie Roberts: I have looked into patents, and patents on art are pretty difficult. You can get them, but then you have to enforce them. And when I get into something, I really — I get into 175%. So I have done every online course and researched other entrepreneurs in every field and even people like — I think it’s Sarah Blakely that does the Spanx brand. As a male, I don’t know if you’re aware, but I mean, Spanx is a huge brand. So maybe at this point you know what that is. But I mean, even on her designs, she said she had patents and people were ripping it off here and there. And she’s like, you know, I didn’t have enough time, I didn’t care enough, really, to go after every one of them. I just was focused on what I was doing. And that girl is into making billions these days. So there’s a lot of stories kind of like hers that make me believe there’s copycats. I already have copycats. And I try to just see it as flattery. They’re not doing as much. But —

Tim Church: Their shops are open, right?

Stephanie Roberts: Yeah, yeah, their shops are open all the time, just like — yeah, exactly. But yeah, I think I’m just going to keep my blinders on and keep trying to do what I’m doing and always stay ahead of them. That’s kind of one thing, it’s kind of motivated me to always stay ahead and be thinking of more, not to get comfortable or same like, you know, looking ahead, maybe we could assume I have some business in the future. But let’s not always assume. Let’s just work and earn that business and keep your clientele and keep the customers coming back for more. So it has motivated me in that way to not get comfortable and say, this is easy-peasy from here on out. No. I need to always be doing more. So that’s pretty cool.

Tim Church: So Stephanie, what advice would you give other pharmacists out there who have other interests and passions beyond pharmacy that maybe have the potential to be monetized?

Stephanie Roberts: I don’t know if I would say, jump into it. But you can do it. I mean, I just, I really think if you have a passion and a will — I saw this quote I think just two days ago, and it’s so simple. But it just really hit home for me, and it was just like, “I don’t know how, but I’m going to do it.” I mean, it was something like that. But I don’t know how, but I’ll make it happen. And it’s just like yeah, that’s exactly what it is. I don’t always know the how, but I’m going to figure it out and I’m going to do it. And I think anybody can. I think as I’ve entered my 30s and the more I’ve listened to and digested all these wonderful podcasts that exist that interview all these amazing entrepreneurs and people doing — it’s just like, you can do it. I mean, it’s amazing you can do it, how you can think outside the box and really make it happen. Growing up, I just really didn’t do that. It just seemed like degree all the way and that’s all you can do. And now I really want to educate my kids on — I mean, college is wonderful and I hope they go to college, but there’s so much more outside of that with being creative thinkers and finding a solution to a problem and that’s how some of the best inventions are made. I would just say if you’re really into it and you have a passion for it, do it. I don’t think money is always the best motivator. I think after awhile, you would get — you’re going to be exhausted and give up if it’s only about the money because I know from experience if this had only been about the money, oh, I would have given up a long time ago. It’s been exhausting. It’s been hard. But like I said, with three little kids at home, it’s not been easy. But I wanted it. So I kept on going. And I went days with only three hours of sleep every night. And that really takes a toll on you. But I wanted it. So I was going to keep on going. And I don’t think if you’re doing it only for the money that you would push through all the time. So you know, if you find something you’re passionate about, go for it.

Tim Church: I love that. Well said, Stephanie. Well thank you so much for coming on the show, sharing your story, really looking forward to hear how you continue to just explode this business. And I look forward to the day when you’re shop’s open and possibly I can order something for my wife. But also I like the coasters too, so even though you said you’re catering to a lot of women out there, I definitely think that there’s some really cool designs that you’ve done, especially if you’re a pharmacist or have that background that are really cool to have in your house. So I would encourage you to check out some of the designs. So if someone wants to reach out to you or learn more about what you’re doing and Art by Stephanie, what’s the best place to go?

Stephanie Roberts: Well thank you so much. And I have made some male designs for some male pharmacists and some doctors that did not have glitter pills in them. That’s all it takes. You just subtract those out, and it’s a male coaster. But Instagram is the best place to find me, and it’s pretty simple, but it’s @artbystephanieroberts. And you can get everything you need from there. The link is in the profile for my shop. Again, that’s most Sundays. But you know, @artbystephanieroberts on Instagram, you can find my email from there. And that’s really the place to go.

Tim Church: Thank you for listening to this episode. And as always, if you liked the content and want to hear more side hustle and pharmacist entrepreneur stories, please leave us a review on the Apple podcasts app or whatever player you use so we can get the message out and help other pharmacists on their financial journey. Just a reminder, if you want to win some of Stephanie’s art, follow @YourFinancialPharmacist and @artbystephanieroberts on Instagram and then comment on our audiogram post that’s going to be posted on Instagram Friday, March 13. And you’ve got one week to do this, and we will announce the winner the following week on Friday, March 20.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 142: Scripting Your Dream Career with Dr. Adam Martin


Scripting Your Dream Career with Dr. Adam Martin

Dr. Adam Martin joins Tim Ulbrich on the show to discuss his most recent book Gen-Z Pharmacist: Dominate Pharmacy School & Script Your Dream Career.

Dr. Martin is the founder of The Fit Pharmacist, host of The Fit Pharmacist Healthcare Podcast and a two-time author.

About Today’s Guest

Dr. Adam Martin works with people to write their script for success using proper nutrition, stress management, and the power of a positive attitude. He earned his doctorate of pharmacy degree from the University of Pittsburgh School of Pharmacy, and with over 7 years of experience working full-time in the community pharmacy setting, he’s passionate about empowering other pharmacists and pharmacy students to put the health back into healthcare through leading by example in their professional practice to not only live their best lives, but to inspire others along the way to do the same. He pairs his PharmD with his expertise as a certified personal trainer and nutrition consultant to guide self-care back into healthcare.

Dr. Martin is the founder of The Fit Pharmacist, LLC. As a National Speakers Association (NSA) Professional Speaker, Adam’s core passion is traveling to pharmacy schools across the world to speak to pharmacy students, sharing practical plans of action that will empower them to maximize their careers and create a competitive edge in the profession to maximize their success and degree of impact.

He has made his life’s work showing people how to take control of their overall wellness, sharing SimpleSolutions through his writing for numerous pharmacy publications including PharmacyTimes magazine, and is the author of the best-selling book Rx: You: The Pharmacist’s Survival Guide for Managing Stress & Fitting in Fitness as well as the forthcoming book Gen-Z Pharmacist: Dominate Pharmacy School & Script Your Dream Career.

He is the host of The Fit Pharmacist Healthcare Podcast, sharing successes and practical strategies from the most successful minds in the profession of pharmacy with a new episode released every week. You can subscribe and learn more here: https://thefitpharmacist.com/podcast

With a passion for learning and serving his patients, he’s an inaugural member of the Pennsylvania Pharmacists Association’s Leadership Excellence and Advocacy Development (LEAD) program, and strives to serval the global community of pharmacy as a medical missionary, having served in Honduras and Panama as a pharmacist in the field. In 2019, he was named the “Most Influential Pharmacist” by SingleCare’s Best of the Best Pharmacy Awards.

You can connect with him on Instagram

Twitter / Facebook / LinkedIn: @FitPharmFam

YouTube: https://www.youtube.com/thefitpharmacist

Summary

In this episode, Dr. Adam Martin digs into his reason for writing his most recent book the Gen-Z Pharmacist: Dominate Pharmacy School & Script Your Dream Career and key points in it.

Adam explains that the number one problem he heard other pharmacists say was that they were never taught how to be a pharmacist. Although they were extensively trained in medicine and other essential knowledge that lays the PharmD groundwork, they didn’t know how to enter the workforce, interact with their colleagues, develop their career, or attend conferences. Essentially, pharmacists entering the workforce already felt behind.

Adam identified this problem and knew that something needed to be done. He’s very passionate about giving back to pharmacy programs and wanted to make a lasting impact on students. He decided to focus on what isn’t taught in a PharmD program but needs to be known. Over a four year period, Adam wrote his second book, Gen-Z Pharmacist: Dominate Pharmacy School & Script Your Dream Career.

The book is divided into two parts. The first part is about your prescription to dominate pharmacy school. Topics like clarifying your why, molding your mindset and networking are discussed. Part two delves into how to script your career. This section consists of 22 expert interviews with some of the best pharmacists in their niche. In this section, pharmacy students ask seasoned pharmacists what they would have done differently in the pharmacy school and their career to get to where they are today but faster.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. I’m excited to welcome Dr. Adam Martin back on the show to talk about his most recent book, “Gen Z Pharmacist: Dominate pharmacy school and script your dream career.” Dr. Martin was previously on the show back on Episode 091 with Tim Church as a part of our side hustle series where he talked about how to become a fit pharmacist. Now, for those who don’t already know Adam, honestly, I’m not really sure how that’s the case as he’s everywhere having a positive impact, now internationally as well on so many so early in his career. His mindset, positivity and energy for helping inspire others to be the best version of themselves is second to none. I’ve been blessed to get to know Adam over the past couple years, and he’s inspired me and I’m confident will do the same for those listening today. Adam, welcome back to the show.

Adam Martin: Dr. Tim, it is a pleasure to be back, my man.

Tim Ulbrich: So glad to have you. It’s great to have you back in front of the YFP community, and it’s an exciting time for you with the recent book launch we’ll talk more about on the show as well as getting back from an international speaking gig. Tell us more.

Adam Martin: Yeah, man, so that was a blast. I actually just got back from speaking in Ireland at two pharmacy schools. So I was invited to speak on a mental health symposium in the city of Cork, Ireland. So flew into Dublin and then drove to Cork. And in Ireland, there’s three schools of pharmacy. So a little background: The healthcare system in Ireland is roughly three years behind that of the rest of the world. So just to paint a scenario for you, if someone has a mental health crisis, let’s say they have suicidal thoughts and they go to their provider, at that point, there is a 6-8 week waiting period for them to get any kind of treatment.

Tim Ulbrich: Gees.

Adam Martin: That paired with the fact that there’s a lot of stigma and no one’s talking about mental health is what’s prompted the creation of this symposium. So I was invited to speak. It was the first time ever in the country. All three schools of pharmacy were there. There were about 250 pharmacy students from the country. I spoke along with psychiatrists and pharmacists doing groundbreaking research to advance mental health. And it was the first time that there was a gathering to talk about mental health resources available and how to break down that stigma and lead to a positive impact. And the other thing that was fun — and I didn’t know this until shortly before the talk — is Irish people tend to be somewhat reserved. So they’re not used to my speaking style, and if you ever heard me speak, it is not a talk. It is an experience.

Tim Ulbrich: You bring it. You bring it.

Adam Martin: Yes. So I get everyone engaged, I get literally people up dancing in the talk. So they — the words that they used was “bloody brilliant.”

Tim Ulbrich: Bloody brilliant.

Adam Martin: It was a blast, man. And then I went the next day to speak at Trinity College at Dublin all about self-care, specifically for combating burnout that we’re facing in our profession because we hear about that all the time here in the States, but this is something that’s global. So it was an honor to be a voice representing pharmacy from the United States to talk about that in Ireland and bring what I’ve been working on here over there.

Tim Ulbrich: What an awesome experience. I mean, we talk about opportunity meeting the interest, the passion you have, the impact that you want to have. But just to be able to have that experience in Ireland, I followed you on Instagram throughout that journey. It looked like you were having a blast while you were there. So not only that, but you’ve got a second book out as well. I mean, how does that feel? We’ll reflect more on the details of the book and some of the concepts in there, but man, as you’re on the back end, the journey of writing a book is intense. I’ve joked with many, I’ve done it one, I’m not sure I’m going to do it again.

Adam Martin: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: But you’ve done it twice now. I mean, how does it feel to be on the back end of it?

Adam Martin: Oh man, so this actually is a funny — it leads me to a podcast that I did with a really world-renowned author. His name is Michael Lozier. And if you ever heard of the law of attraction, there’s a book called “Law of Attraction.” And it is a phenomenal read about mindset. But when I was interviewing him, I said, “Oh, I love your book. I’ve read it like five times, listened to it.” And he’s like, “Oh, that’s funny. I wrote it 100 times.” And at the time, I laughed. But after writing my second book, I was like, that is so true. So yeah, man, it’s a lot of revision and that’s really what people need to know is if you’re thinking about writing a book, really doing anything, the first draft is going to be trash. So you have to get started and dive into that process. And it’s fun. You learn, you get insight as you go. But that won’t happen until you get started. So that’s my learning experience and turned into piece of advice for anyone considering going down that path.

Tim Ulbrich: I think that’s great advice, and I think for many that have the aspirations of writing a book, they see a finished product and they think, oh my gosh, it’s so overwhelming, I’m never going to get there. But as you and I both know, to your point, the first draft often you look back at and you’re like, what was I thinking? You know, in terms of what I had here. But just the small compound effect, you write a few hundred words a day, you keep at it, and you get a draft on paper, you make revisions, you get feedback from others, and you start to refine your message and see what’s resonating.

Adam Martin: Absolutely.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s talk about the book in detail. Again, the title is “Gen Z Pharmacist: Dominate pharmacy school and script your career.” Our listeners can learn more and get a copy at FitPharmacist.com/book. Now, three things that I love about this book as I had a chance to get a sneak preview from Adam: No. 1 — and I’ve shared this with you already — I think it’s really written in a way that is easy to understand, it’s digestable, and it’s written by someone who really has been through this journey. You know, you’ve walked the walk. And I think you’re doing a great job of teaching it. And I think it’s written in a way that it’s action-oriented is really the second piece that I love is that you can’t blow through this book. I think you’ve done a really nice job of you’re talking about some big things in the text in terms of mindset, you talk about leadership and time management, all these different concepts, and you really do a great job of forcing the reader to stop, reflect, and actually have space in the book where they can do some activities to think about that. I thought that was awesome. And then the second part of the book, which you called “Script Your Career: Experts speak,” you’ve got I think 20-something I think different experts that you have examples and stories from that I think really just showcases not only the journey you’ve had but also others. And so the thought that went behind this, you know, I think often when I see people that publish multiple books, you think, man, what are they pumping out? How quick are they doing it? What’s the quality? The intentionality here was awesome, and I think you did a really wonderful job. And I’m excited to talk more about this. So let’s start with why. What was the need? I mean, you’ve got your first book that was out, I see a copy in the book here as we’re recording.

Adam Martin: Yeah, there it is.

Tim Ulbrich: What’s the need for a second book? What was the mission and the vision?

Adam Martin: Absolutely. So first off, thank you for the kind words, Tim. I really appreciate that. It means a lot coming from you. I have tremendous respect for you and all the work that you’ve done and the impact you’re making for pharmacy. And I think that’s why you and I resonate so well and why we’re joining forces, sneak preview, for something coming up later in the spring. But to answer your question, so I’ve worked first as a nutrition consultant, and I’ve been doing that since 2013. And my niche is pharmacy students and pharmacists. And you know, we talk about problems, struggles, things like that. And the No. 1 problem that I kept hearing was very similar to what we all faced when we graduated. And that is I was never taught how to be a pharmacist. Yes, I was taught all the knowledge and all of the medication information and all those essentials that laid the groundwork for what our PharmD is for. But when it comes time to actually entering the workforce, interacting with your colleagues and then also developing your career in an increasingly competitive industry, how do you leverage social media? And then there’s all this talk about personal branding. Oh yeah, and then there’s conferences. And then there’s all that stuff that you’re not taught about in a structured way. And you get out in the workforce and then you feel behind. And something that’s something that people were struggling with a lot. So I thought, man, something needs to be done about this. So you asked why a second book, but the fun fact is I actually started working on this book before my first book came out. So this book was a four-year process because I do work full-time in the community and run a business. So time was interesting. But as far as the reason why, that comes to innovation. And that’s a core belief and a core concept at University of Pittsburgh School of Pharmacy, where I graduated, that being innovation, leadership, and excellence. So whenever I graduated, if you guys know my story, I was quite on the struggle bus to even get into pharmacy school.

Tim Ulbrich: Last seat, right? Last seat.

Adam Martin: Yeah. Last seat. Last one to get in, and no one in my class knew it. But I ended up being president of my class and all that other stuff. But because of that, and I worked so hard to get in, I was tremendously grateful for the opportunity and I had just such an amazing learning experience with phenomenal faculty and just great networking. So when I graduated, I started to think, man, I really need to give back. Like I need to get involved. So I started guest lecturing and helping some of my professors here and there. But working full-time, I would only be able to get in like when my schedules aligned, like once a semester. So that wasn’t really making a huge impact. Then I thought well, they asked for contributions financially, which is great, but I’m not a gazillionaire yet. But you know, after reading “Seven Figure Pharmacist,” it’s going to happen. Shameless plug. But you know, I don’t have enough money to make a huge impact with like a building or whatnot. So I thought, you know, how can I put this concept of innovation into practice? So I thought, what am I good at? What do I enjoy? What do people resonate with? And it’s writing and speaking. So I thought about what they don’t teach you in pharmacy school but what everyone needs in order to be a successful pharmacist. So I reached out to the dean and I said, “Hey, I thought about this idea of writing a book to complement pharmacy school. But before I do it, I just want to make sure that this doesn’t exist so I’m not spinning my wheels.” And she said, “No, it doesn’t exist.” So I was like, awesome. Well, what I want to do is I want to write a book helping students on this process so that when they graduate, they have the groundwork to hit the ground running. And what I want to do is reach out to 22 of the best pharmacists in their niche that are really crushing it. So like nuclear pharmacy, administration, dean of pharmacy school, how to get a residency if you want to get a PhD after pharmacy, all of those types of things. And what I want to do is I want to interview them and say right now, you are the best at what you do. And you’ve been doing this for years. If you knew you were going to end where you are now on your first day of pharmacy school, what would you do differently to get there faster? What organizations would you have joined? What publications, what meetings, all of those types of things. And that was my original idea. And she said, “That’s a great idea, but what if instead of you doing the interviews, you have pharmacy students do them so it’s not only a book for pharmacy students but written by pharmacy students.”

Tim Ulbrich: Love it.

Adam Martin: And it sounded great until I realized how to implement that. So you’ve got a dude that’s full-time community — and if you guys work in community, you know how rigid that structure is. I mean, we’ve got to submit our vacation requests like a year and a half advance. So you’ve got that. I’m running a business, diving into my speaking career, OK, and then you’ve got 22 super busy people that are crushing it and then you try to get pharmacy students who are in pharmacy school in leadership positions. So try to align those schedules 22 different times.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Adam Martin: And that turned into four years.

Tim Ulbrich: So Adam, what I hear there is a lot of persistence as well as certainly some good mentorship and folks that gave you insight into the book. But I think that last part, you know, interviewing 20-something folks that are crushing it in their respective careers, honestly, that alone could probably be a separate book, could be a separate resource, could be a separate podcast — not that you have free time. But really getting insights into folks, you know, that’s something that I often wonder is I love the concept of sitting down with somebody and just asking them about you know, what’s made you successful? What’s your routines, your habits? And there’s obviously a lot of networking to be had there but also to learn. And that was really a big takeaway for me as I read this book was man, I wish I would have had this in pharmacy school. I wish I would have had this available to me. I just think it’s an incredible, incredible resource. And I see so many connections between this and the financial piece.

Adam Martin: Oh yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And again, sneak preview, excited we’re going to be collaborating on some things, more things going forward. But in the book — and we’ll talk here in a minute — you talk about clarifying your why and mindset and time management and developing an outside passion and leadership and mentorship and thinking about the long game. And the thread, so much of that for me depends on is your financial situation in a position that you can clearly focus on all of those things? Because what I hear from so many people is, yes, yes, yes, but hey, I’m in $200,000 of debt and I can’t see what’s beyond this $200,000 of debt. And so I think there’s so many connections here to having a sound financial base and having a good financial plan so that you can be able to focus on these things. And so to that point, Chapter 1, which I loved, you started with this concept of clarify your why, which is something we talk about on this show as it relates to one’s financial situation. But tell me more about what you mean in terms of this concept of clarifying your why.

Adam Martin: Absolutely. So with the book, there’s two parts. The second part we talked about are the interviews that we did. So what that is it’s looking Part 1, the concepts we explore and how people in the industry have put those into practice and are thriving because of it. So it’s kind of like, here’s the script and literally Part 1 is “Your Rx to Dominate Pharmacy School.” But then Part 2 is here’s people that did this, and here’s the result. So absolutely. And that comes down to two parts. So we want to impact patients. We want to have a way to help people enrich their lives. We can’t do that until we can do that for ourselves. So that’s why in the first part, there is self-mastery and then relationship building. So the reason that the first chapter is clarify your why is because in order to thrive in your business, in your personal endeavors, whatever that looks like for you, you will face adversity, you will face setbacks.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.

Adam Martin: Guaranteed.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Adam Martin: And if you only have a short-term goal like “I want to make a ton of money,” or “I want a name for myself” or whatever that is, you will fail every time. But if you have a why that is bigger than yourself, if you have a purpose that extends farther beyond you, you will be able to realign with that and stick through that and do what it takes to overcome those hurdles.

Tim Ulbrich: Yes.
Adam Martin: For example, if you’re listening to this and you have kids, alright? When you’re sick, when you are exhausted, when you’ve got projects on the line, but your kid needs help, you do it anyway because it’s something bigger than yourself.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep, absolutely.

Adam Martin: It’s the same concept. So that’s why having a why that is clear, aligned with your goals and is bigger than you, making it about other people instead of just yourself, that’s the secret to staying at the long game because it is a process. And the thing you people have to realize is it’s not — and this is something that’s rampant in our profession being everyone Type A. I mean, I’m so Type A, my name starts with A. So I get it, y’all. Real talk. But you have to realize that it’s not going to be getting it right the first time. You can’t focus on being perfect. And we’re wired to think that way because literally as pharmacists, depending on your role, if you’re dispensing, one mistake could kill someone. That’s reality. So we take that thought process, and it translates into other areas of our life. So you have to shift your focus away from perfection and on progress because it’s a process not a one-and-done, and you have to realize that the value is on progress not perfection.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. And if I could even add onto that, you know, Seth Godin, one of my favorite authors, would argue that you want to run from perfection. You want to fail often but quickly. And obviously, there’s places where you don’t want to fail and when you think about medication safety and other things. But you know, in terms of developing yourself as an individual, a road of perfection and a road of no challenges is one of the greatest fears I have for my children.

Adam Martin: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: I don’t want them to have that, you know. They need to have adversity. They need to learn through that because as I reflect back even on a young career, like those moments, being in those, however painful they can be and however significant they seem in the moment, that’s really where the sweetness is happening. And to this concept of why, you know, again, to the listeners, the action-oriented nature of this book, I’m on page 6 here. Here I am, maybe I pick up your book and I feel like I’m just going to fly through this thing. And I’ve got to sit down and reflect on my why. And I can tell you that I recently did this activity to over 100 students in a personal finance course here at Ohio State, and I had them reflect on their why using some of the life planning questions we’ve talked about before on the podcast. And I will tell you through those responses, rarely have people thought about this question. And this is somewhat uncomfortable to think about. I think that’s good, that’s the purpose of the activity, you stop, you reflect. But again, I think it speaks to the nature of this book, you’re not just talking about this concept, you know, here I am on page 6 and I’ve already got to dig in and do some work, which is awesome.

Adam Martin: I love it, man. But yeah, to your point about the action-oriented nature of the book. And I’m an NSA professional speaker. And I tell people this at almost all my talks. I’m not a motivational speaker. I’m not here to pump you up. If you want to get pumped up, go to the gym. I’m here to literally make an impact and get you thinking to change your life and move the needle in the direction so that we can create momentum right now because when I leave, there’s two choices. I leave and a couple days later, you’re right back in your old habits.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. Right.

Adam Martin: Or in the moment while I’m with you, we create an action plan so that you can just do simple steps to get the momentum moving. And that’s the key because I’m really good at bringing the energy and getting people in peak states of motivation. But unless you do something with that, nothing’s going to happen. So I took that same concept with the book. I talk about the concepts in simple terms to lay it down. But at the end of every chapter, there is a place to put that into practice specific to you, the reader, because all of us are different. We’re all at different places in our life. I’ve had pharmacists that have been graduated over 15 years saying, this book is starting to change my career. So while it’s catered to pharmacy students, it depends where you are in your career. And this really can impact anyone in the profession.

Tim Ulbrich: Well, and to that point, Adam, I mean, I’ve been out of school for 12 years. And I tried to hang onto my title of “new practitioner” as long as I could, but I don’t think I can use it anymore. But I think there’s something to learn here for everyone. I mean, to me, the mindset is you are always learning. So while I talk about your why all the time or I talk about mindset or time management, like, I don’t have all the answers. I mean, I always have something to learn in these areas. And I think this is another great resource that yes, it’s really geared toward pharmacy students, but I think many can learn beyond that. Now, Chapter 2, Mold Your Mindset. And I want to spend a few minutes talking about this because one of the things I love about you, Adam, is I feel like mindset, mindset, mindset. You know, I had a chance to meet with you in person on a couple occasions, and I strategically brought my son with me one time because I wanted him to see firsthand, you know, he might not be able to articulate it as 7 or 8 years, but being around people like you that have positivity, have mindset, you know, it’s a choice that you make despite circumstances that are around you, you know? It reminds me, I’m coaching first and second graders in basketball right now. And we’re learning a lesson on joy v. happiness.

Adam Martin: Ah.

Tim Ulbrich: And so this mindset thing, I want for a moment, give us some practical tips or strategies because I think you do this so well. And you talk about in the book as well that you’ve used or you’ve seen others successfully implement that helps to mold the mindset. You know, I think we all agree that having this mindset is incredibly important, but what are some things that folks can think about that either worked for you or that have worked for others?

Adam Martin: Absolutely. So it really comes down to what your focus is. So Bruce Lee once said, “As you think, so shall you become.” And it’s really a simple concept, but when you try to apply that to the organized chaos of pharmacy, it doesn’t seem so simple because you’ve got a lot of things. You’ve got doctor calls, you’ve got texts, you’ve got patient questions, you’ve got errors, you’ve got issues, all of that stuff. But you’ve got to put a smile on that face. How are you going to do that when you feel stressed and stretched too thin to even like have time to drink water or eat lunch during a break you don’t get or stand on your feet for 13 hours? How are you going to do that? How are you going to smile? How are you going to make it real? So it really comes down to the focus of how you’re going to conduct yourself at work or in your job and then also outside of work because if you’re having a stressful moment and you need to deal with that, that’s not really practical in the moment at a pharmacy because your patients are your priority.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Adam Martin: But if you don’t put in that work of self-growth and development outside, that’s really where it comes from. So to answer your question, what’s a simple tip? It’s really what you focus on. So in pharmacy, in life, there are two realities. There are things that you can control and there are things that you cannot control. And what we tend to do as Type A pharmacists is we like to just blur that line, like, oh, we’ll figure it out. We’ll make this work. So we’re wired as humans to focus on the negative, that’s what we’re wired to because that’s what kept us alive back in the primal age. And you guys probably listening to this, you probably see this happen. You have a win, something’s checked off the list, and it’s just gone. And now you’re focused on what’s the next problem I need to fix.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Adam Martin: And we get our focus set on problems we can’t fix. And if you just look on Facebook at a lot of the large pharmacy pages, that’s all you see is bickering and complaining about things you can’t necessarily control. And while they’re true and I’m not saying there’s no problems, there’s always room for improvement. And yes, there are some issues that we’re facing in our profession. If you focus on that long enough, that’s exactly what you’re going to get. That’s the mindset you’re going to have. That’s the emotion you’re going to create. And that is the action you’re going to interact with others as. So I’m not saying ignore problems, I’m not saying that if you go out in your garden and you see weeds, you close your eyes and say, “No weeds, no weeds, no weeds!” If you open your eyes, the weeds are still there. You’ve got to get down on your knees and yank those suckers out. But what I am saying is focus on the fact that you have the power to pull those weeds out.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Adam Martin: Focus on what you can control and focus on those wins. Look at where you can make an impact, both in your own life and in the life of your colleagues, partner and your patients.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think this is another great example, Adam, and you go on I think in Chapter 3 or 4 talking about self-care and again, bringing back the financial piece, being in a position of having a good mindset, being able to mold your mindset, you have to have other behaviors, other strategies in place to give yourself the opportunity to be there. You know, I think about the value of something like a morning routine for a community pharmacist who gets up, alarm clock goes off, you start checking your email, the day is crazy, you run into a 12-hour shift, and you walk into chaos and in the moment, maybe a floater left you a bunch of baggage from the night before, the phone starts ringing.

Adam Martin: No.

Tim Ulbrich: That day from the very beginning was set up to not necessarily be successful in terms of mindset. So what I like about — and for me, it’s been things like morning routines that include journaling and meditation and prayer and gratitude reflections. And you give some great examples here in the book as well. But I think this is a great area for folks to think about what works for them but starting your day with intentionality, No. 1, and really leaning on others and seeing what others are doing and seeing what ultimately will work for your plan as well. And you know, many have heard this said over and over again, find those that are doing things successful that you want to role model your behaviors after. Find out what they’re doing. And hint, many of those people are very willing to share what their successes are and to talk about it. And so I think really finding people that you look at and say, wow, they’ve really got a different attitude about the day, they’ve got a different mindset. Well, why is that? You know? Ask them some questions, learn about their behaviors and habits. And I think you do a really nice job in Chapter 2 talking about some ways that folks can do that.

Adam Martin: Thank you. But yeah, to your point, that’s absolutely spot-on. You’ve got to have those morning rituals. And it’s super important. But looking at — because what you said happens at the time of getting into work and there’s all these problems. And that’s a slippery slope with the mindset of looking at problems saying, oh, it’s going to be one of those days or, oh, this always happens to me. If you say things like that and believe things like that and say like, oh, I don’t have hours, I don’t have the time, blah, blah, blah, that’s what you’re going to look for. That’s what this concept plays out to be. But instead, if you ask the question of how is this happening for me and if you just change that just a little change in your mindset but specifically the questions you ask will determine the quality of your life. So I just want to harp that point because it’s huge at breaking that slippery slope of negativity.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, absolutely. I love that. And I’m going to jump ahead here a little bit in the book. My goal here is not that we would cover the book in its entirety.

Adam Martin: Oh yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: I want folks to pick it up and read it and take action themselves. But in Chapter 9, you talk about Nurture Your Networking. And as soon as I saw you make a connection between network and net worth, I said, “I’ve got to” — I mean, it’s a financial show. Got to ask him about them. It’s something we’ve talked about before, the power of networking. We had David Burkus on the show to talk about his book, “Friend of a Friend.” So talk to me about networking, the importance, the value and ultimately, you know, why a pharmacy student should be really strategically thinking about this and how they may feel like hey, I’m in a vulnerable position, I don’t really have much to contribute or share, you know, some practical strategies for how they can implement this.

Adam Martin: Excellent question. So the profession of pharmacy hinges on one concept: It’s all about relationships. And that is so true. And that applies to all areas of life, whatever profession, whatever niche you’re in. It’s all about relationships. And how many of you have heard pharmacy’s a small world? So that’s the truth. And you can either ignore it or ask how can I be resourceful with this fact, coming back to that question that you ask yourself. So a lot of times, to your question of how can people get started if they’re a pharmacy student or if they have this thinking of, oh, I haven’t started yet. And they get in that trap of comparison like, oh, well I don’t have a podcast or I don’t have a book or I don’t have Your Financial Pharmacist success, like who am I to say this and that? Don’t fall into that imposter syndrome.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Adam Martin: Every single person would be so grateful to learn from your experience. And in another chapter, I talk about the three levels of mentorship. And that is the concept that a lot of us think of as, oh, just get someone that has more degrees than the thermometer and learn everything that they know. And that’s mentorship. That’s one of three parts. The other part is having someone on your level that is looking to make progress. But the other part that so many people miss is the best way to learn is to teach. And while you might think that you’re not “there yet,” or you haven’t “made it,” whatever that means, you have people in your influence, in your school, in your company, that would love to learn your points that you’ve gone through, that are starting where you started a year or two ago. So the third part of mentorship is teaching someone who is starting where you started. While you might not think you have value, everyone has a story, everyone has experiences, and everybody wants a mentor. So by teaching that, it creates what I call the win-win-win framework. You can stock that so that you win, they win, and the people you serve win because both of you are rising together.

Tim Ulbrich: Love that. Great advice. So again, we’ve just hit on a couple high points here. I would encourage our listeners, check out a copy of the book, FitPharmacist.com/book. And as Adam mentioned, Part 1 is Your Prescription to Dominate Pharmacy School, ranging topics from why to mindset, self-care, time management, networking, mentorship, just so much wisdom here. And again, a resource I certainly wish I would have had in pharmacy school. And then Part 2, Script Your Career, experts speak, over 20 different experts sharing their career journey, stories and what’s allowed them to be successful in their own regards. And I think, Adam, before I wrap up with a couple questions here, I want to come full circle. You know, you alluded to this concept of making it, whatever that means. And I think bringing this all the way back to the beginning, this is why I loved that you started Chapter 1 with the why because all of this really goes back to this concept of what is the goal? You know, I think so many pharmacy students have this image of success in their mind or residents, they’re chasing something. But they haven’t stopped to think about what are they chasing? Why are they chasing? And do they really want to be chasing that?

Adam Martin: Absolutely.

Tim Ulbrich: And you know, this is where you see people I think often that may be 5, 7, 10 years out and maybe they finally got to whatever they had aspired to be, but they look up and say, “I’m burned out, I’m miserable. This isn’t what I thought I would be.” And I think it goes back to all the way to the beginning, taking time to stop and reflect and say, “Why? Why? What was the purpose to begin with?” And then you start to mold the plan around the why. So we often have people that approach us and say, “You know, I’ve got a really cool idea. I’d like to write a book. But my gosh, I have no idea where to start.” You mentioned four years. We might have scared them based on that statement. But talk to us about process. Like what was this like for you in terms of the daily, the weekly, the monthly rhythms to ultimately have something that you’re holding in hand and you’re distributing it? What was the process that you were able to implement to write the book?

Adam Martin: Yeah, so that comes to what we started this podcast talking about is you don’t want to be perfect the first time. You want to leverage your struggle to create your strength. And that’s really how my whole personal brand began, and that’s a whole other podcast that I think we did, actually. But the thing is is for me, one of my weaknesses is I get great ideas. And if I don’t write them down right away, they’re gone. And I don’t know if you ever resonate with this, but you’ll have a great idea and then like you get distracted and then you think, oh, what was that awesome idea? And you like think and think and think and it never comes back. So I learned quickly to avoid that pain of what was that golden nugget to writing things down. So I would just get ideas, whether it was driving to work or at home or whatever. Most of my ideas come from walking or in the shower. Real talk.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep. I’m with you there.

Adam Martin: So I would just write those down. And that’s literally how I started. I got these ideas and as I kept writing them down, I started to see the structure. I started to see how those aligned in a bigger picture. I would have — so I’m very active on Instagram @thefitpharmacist is the best place to reach me — but I would have people ask me questions through DM or commenting on my posts about struggles, about things they’ve been dealing with. And I kept seeing repeat questions. I was like, wow, there’s a need here. This needs to be addressed. So collectively, just taking notes and engaging with people and just being of service to others, that’s where this content, that’s where this concept came from. So a lot of people think, oh, you’ve got to sit down and crank it out and write 12 hours a day. No, guys. Like this book started from getting an idea and writing it down.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Adam Martin: Getting an idea and writing it down. Doing it over and over again and just looking at how can this be of value? And that’s how you start. It’s always a draft when you start. So why not start with one word?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and this reminds me of one of my favorite books, “The Compound Effect” by Darren Hardy, you know, which relates to finances but any goal, any project you’re working on, is small steps eventually over time result in big things. And I think that’s so true with writing, you know, you’ll see often people will do writing challenges, a few hundred words here or there. But it’s really true. It’s the habit, it’s the practice, and you surprise yourself. You look back and say, “Wow. I didn’t realize I could do this.” Then you start to shape it, you form it, it becomes a chapter. You beat it up, you get to Version 2, Version 3, and so on. But so much less intimidating than starting out and saying OK, I’m going to write a book from scratch. And I always encourage people, if there’s a topic you’re really passionate about, you know, start writing it down and posting things on LinkedIn and doing some other things. Then after 10 or 15 or 20 of those, you’ve got the beginnings of what could be a chapter or a section of a book or certainly could be a podcast or some other medium. Something I also want to point out to our listeners that are thinking about OK, so yes, Adam, you’ve written a book, but you’ve also built a brand. And sometimes I hate that word because I think it’s like we envision Adam as just like scheming in his house how to brand and market things. But the point I want to make here is that as I followed your journey for several years, you started in one place, which is a place I’m passionate about. You provided a value and service to others based on a pain point and a problem that needed to be solved and was one that you were passionate about. You didn’t start by thinking about how you were going to scheme a brand. You started by providing value, providing value, providing value, consistently, regularly, and from that, you’ve learned from the community what they’ve like, what they’ve resonated, what they’re passionate about, where you can provide a service. And so as you’re working then on a book, something like that, you’ve got a group that’s been following you and following your work because you have served them. And I think in my opinion, great businesses are formed off of serving individuals. And I’ve truly believed when you do that well, often the business will follow closely behind.

Adam Martin: 100%. And that comes back to your question about what’s the value of networking, and it’s what you just said. It’s all about relationships. So again, I like providing value in everything I say whether it’s a podcast or talking, so challenge to you, the listener. If you’re thinking about writing a book, if you’re thinking about doing any sort of endeavor whether starting or diving deeper, ask yourself two questions: What are you passionate about? And how can this help other people? Just like someone who thought, I’m passionate about investing and creating financial freedom, I see that there’s a problem with students coming out of pharmacy school at an average of $120,000 in debt, there is a need. I can help them based on my passion. Who am I describing, Tim?

Tim Ulbrich: Sounds familiar. Vaguely.

Adam Martin: Yeah, you. Exactly. And because of that, because you focused on that, you have built a brand that is so strong because it’s not based on scheming or how can I get a quick buck? It’s on how can I create relationships with people that have a need that I can solve based on my passion. And that concept, that’s your avenue. Mine’s the same with mindset and health. And I realize that our niches, you know, cross ways in a lot of different paths. And in speaking with you through the years, that’s what’s been so exciting with what’s coming up in the future because yes, self-care, self-development is great health and fitness-wise and creating that freedom, but then there’s also the financial piece. That’s the piece that together, creates the whole picture of the pharmacy student, of the pharmacist, to really be the best version of themselves so that they can dispense their full potential to those that they work with and serve.

Tim Ulbrich: And speaking of those paths crossing over, you and I have been scheming for a long time to figure out, man, how can we work together on a speaking engagement, something we both love doing, we’re passionate about inspiring others. And we’re excited to announce it’s finally going to happen this spring. Saturday, April 30, the Ohio Pharmacists Association annual meeting in Columbus, Ohio, really excited. Great meeting that OPA puts on each and every year. They get a great draw of students and new practitioners and pharmacists and we’re excited to bring this topic. So for those that are attending the Ohio Pharmacists Association meeting or maybe perhaps we can inspire them to do that after hearing this, what can those attending expect to hear from our session? What can they take away?

Adam Martin: Absolutely. So real, practical tips on how to manage stress, fit in fitness and create financial freedom for your life. Those things are crushing our profession. They are stopping people from living their dream and leading to burnout, which is a huge epidemic. And by the way, not just here in the States, but I saw it in Ireland too. And that’s why there was a whole conference on self-care because there’s a need, because there’s advice out there. And I’m sure a lot of you resonate with this. It doesn’t seem practical, it’s not specific to our profession and/or taught by people that are actually in the trenches, facing these problems themselves. That’s why I’m really excited for this because I speak the truth, like I’ll talk and I’ll be like, “Hey, I just dealt with this issue yesterday working my 13-hour shift.” Tim, you got out of school with — like your transformation financially is tremendous and you write about that in “Seven Figure Pharmacist.” And that’s the real talk is we face these things ourselves. And we’re able to speak about them with such conviction and passion because we’ve overcome them and we want to help you do it too.

Tim Ulbrich: It’s going to be a lot of fun. Saturday, April 4. I said the 3rd. It’s actually Saturday, April 4. We’re on for 8:15 a.m. And I can tell you, I don’t think the coffee’s going to be needed when Dr. Adam Martin is in the room. So we’re going to bring a lot of energy. We’d love to see you there. You can register for the OPA annual meeting, learn more about the scheduled events, including this session, by visiting OhioPharmacists.org. So Adam, in addition to picking up a copy of the book, FitPharmacist.com/book, best way for our listeners to reach out to you and learn more about the work that you’re doing over the Fit Pharmacist?

Adam Martin: So the ‘gram is jam. So hit up Instagram, @thefitpharmacist, also on the Facebook page where I create many memes because laughter is the best medicine. So you can get all of your funny memes and gifs and everything else in between on The Fit Pharmacist. That’s Facebook, @FitPharmFam.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Always a pleasure, always inspired by the work that you’re doing. Excited for more collaborations in the future and to see what lies ahead and certainly greatly appreciate you taking the time to do this interview and to share your work with the YFP community.

Adam Martin: Hey, Tim, it’s an honor to be on here. Thank you so much for having me. I believe 100% in what you’re doing. And that’s why I’m super excited for this collab.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. And to the YFP community, as always, we appreciate you joining us. And if you like what you heard on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, please leave us a rating and review on Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to your shows each and every week. Again, thank you for joining us, and have a great rest of your week.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 141: How to not wreck your marriage because of student loans


How to not wreck your marriage because of student loans

Steven Chung, tax attorney, joins Tim Ulbrich to discuss about a recent article he published titled ‘Student Loans Can Be the Homewrecker in A Marriage.’ Steven also talks about tax considerations as it relates to couples and why it’s so important to communicate this information.

About Today’s Guest

Steven Chung is a tax attorney in Los Angeles, California where he helps people with basic tax planning and the resolution of tax disputes. He also assists people manage their student loans. He also writes a weekly column on the influential legal news site Above The Law. Steven received his law degree from Whittier Law School and and LLM in Taxation with honors and high distinction from Loyola Law School in Los Angeles. He can be reached via email at [email protected]. Or you can connect with him on Twitter (@stevenchung) and connect with him on LinkedIn.

Summary

Tax attorney Steven Chung discusses how to not wreck your marriage because of student loans with Tim Ulbrich.

He says that the relationships that often work out are the ones in which people fully disclose how much they owe and have a financial plan to pay it off or to pursue forgiveness. If the understanding or shared goals are there, carrying student loan debt shouldn’t affect whether a marriage stays together. On the other hand, Steven says that problems in marriages and relationships happen when the amount of student loan debt a person is carrying isn’t disclosed early enough in a relationship or if a couple has differences in how they want to pay off the debt, their spending habits or financial goals.

If a divorce does happen, there are some variables on what could happen to the loans. If a couple gets married and one person has a lot of loans and the other doesn’t but says that they will pay off the loans, it has to be determined if that was a gift or if the amount that person paid on the loans has to be paid back to them. If that isn’t the case, it’s possible that the loans could be split between both parties. Steven also mentions that if one person is getting a graduate degree during the marriage, the divorce court may say that those loans or tuition has to work collectively to pay it.

Steven also discusses community property states, tax planning with student loans, and what his outlook is on student loan forgiveness.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist. And I’m excited to have joining me tax attorney Steven Chung to talk about how student loans can impact a marriage and strategies that can be taken before and during marriage to mitigate the risks. Now, we’ve talked at length on this show about the student indebtedness pharmacy graduates are facing. And today we shift our focus to talking not about the amount or how to choose the best repayment option for your personal situation but rather, if you have a significant other, best practices for ensuring that you both are on the same page. Steven, welcome and thank you for taking time to come on to the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast.

Steven Chung: Oh, thanks for having me.

Tim Ulbrich: So you recently wrote an article, which we’ll link to in the show notes, and that article is titled “Student Loans Can Be the Home Wrecker in a Marriage.” And as I mentioned, we’ll link to that so our readers can learn more. And I’m going to use that article as the basis for our time together as I think it connects well with what many of our listeners may be facing, and that’s having lots of student loan debt and trying to figure out how to best navigate that if their significant other is in the picture. So for those listening that are not yet married that find themselves carrying student loan debt, what advice would you have for them in terms of how to best disclose or share this information with a future spouse? And why is this so important?

Steven Chung: Well, the thing is, I mean, student loans shouldn’t alone be a — shouldn’t prevent you from getting married. I mean, people come in — I mean, nowadays, a lot of people are coming in with student loan debts and unfortunately, some of them are quite large. But finances are an issue. But as long as both of you have the same financial goals and are willing — have a plan to pay it off one way or another, I mean, it should be doable. I think the problem becomes when No. 1, it’s not just — when the amount of loans is not disclosed early enough or if people just have — the potential spouses have basically incompatible financial habits, I mean, habits and goals. And that can be a problem.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. And one way to wreck a honeymoon, right, is to disclose your student loan debt on a honeymoon. So we should be talking about this in advance, of course. And I think not only the amounts or do you have it but also philosophies around debt. We often talk about on this show that people view debt in different ways. And obviously, everyone has different competing priorities. And so how we’ve been raised and other variable can influence that, and I think so many conversations to be had among couples leading up to that point of becoming married. Now, I’ve seen a lot of data recently about student loans being a reason to delay starting a family. From your experience, do you think the same effect is being had regarding student loan debt impacting one’s decision to get married? Do you sense that for those that are coming out of school today and the debt load that they’re facing, that this is actually having an impact on their decision to get married?

Steven Chung: Oh, absolutely. A lot of people — they usually have two philosophies. One is that they feel guilty about having a large student loan, and they don’t want to burden their potential spouse and their kids. And they think they won’t be able to afford a nice house in a nice neighborhood to raise their kids properly. And the second group of people, they don’t want to get married — they want to marry someone who can either pay off the student loans for them or at least have the same philosophy on paying it off. And it seems like it’s become a problem, especially — it was more problematic during the Great Recession a couple years ago. But even now, the economy’s recovering, people are still kind of wondering about the potential recession and things like that. So it’s kind of making people feel a little — think deeper on financial analysis or some sort of background check, so to speak, on their potential spouse before tying the knot.

Tim Ulbrich: Steven, I was thinking before we recorded as I was preparing for this show, I could see specific situations that could cause difficulty between two individuals if there is not open communication. And three that come to mind — I’m sure there’s many others than three — but I could see a situation where one individual has a lot more debt than the other and a potential for resentment. So somebody that for whatever reason, maybe they don’t have debt through scholarships, parents helped pay for it, they worked, whatever, and somebody else has a lot of debt and potentially some resentment for that situation. Another situation I could see is just different feelings about the debt as I alluded to already and how to repay. You know, some, as we’ve talked about on the show, want to kind of go all in on debt repayment. Others want to take a slower approach with other priorities financially. And the third one I could see is whether or not parents are involved, you know, potentially cosigners or those that had family members directly loan them money. Do any one of these resonate with you more than the others in terms of experiences you’ve seen where this can cause some difficulties and resentment between two individuals?

Steven Chung: OK, definitely by far it is the philosophy on how people want to pay the student loans. There’s some people who want to pay off the debt as quickly as possible. And on the other end, someone just wants to be able to pay the bare minimum and pretty much have the YOLO attitude, You Only Live Once. Those two people, their relationship is probably not going to go anywhere. But usually, the ones that work it out are, like I said, the ones that have — I mean, they fully disclose how much they owe and knowing that, they have a financial plan to try to pay it off or a plan for loan forgiveness if that’s what they want to do and of course at the same time have a financial plan for retirement, buying a house, having children, that kind of thing. So as long as they have that kind of understanding and they’re OK with the spouse’s financial habits and have the same financial goals, whether or not one spouse has a lot more student debt than the other, it shouldn’t matter that much as long as they have some sort of plan to pay it off or to manage it. As for parents being involved or if they’re cosigners, I mean, it’s ultimately up to them. Some people have their parents cosign because they’d rather pay their parents back with interest rather than a bank. Also parents who are a third party might be more forgiving as opposed to a bank who will send collection agencies after them and impose collection fees and possibly sue them, ruin their credit. So there’s a variety of factors that determine whether parents should get involved. So I mean, there’s pros and cons either way, so to speak.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think what you had said about, you know, couples working together with their goals is so important. And I think I don’t want that to get overlooked, something we talk often about on this show of why we think it’s so important that couples start with the goals and then of course they get into the budget and make sure they’re not looking at any one specific part of the financial plan in a silo. So you know, I’ll see this often where we may give a talk to a group of pharmacists or maybe a couple in the audience, they come up, and I can tell within 20 seconds if they have different philosophies on how to spend their money, you know, in terms of whether it be debt repayment or other parts of the plan. And I think if two people can agree on the goals and the shared vision, you know, debt repayment becomes a part of that and hopefully that mitigates any concerns or resentment might be there if there are different amounts of debt that people are carrying. Now, you mentioned in your article that for some married couples, as their joint income goes up, it might make sense for them to refinance their loans. Why is that the case?

Steven Chung: OK. Well, generally, what tends to happen is let’s just say a couple makes a lot more money, they were initially on an income-based repayment plan, paying the bare minimum, but it looks like based on their finances, assuming nothing goes wrong, they’ll probably pay it off within like six or seven years. It’s not going to make sense for them to continue paying on a income-based repayment plan for one reason or another, maybe the interest, maybe interest will increase too much and they probably won’t qualify for loan forgiveness. So basically, if they have a plan to pay it off within let’s say 5-10 years, I mean, they probably just want to refinance because of lower interest rates. So they’re basically saving money that way. So I mean, the only drawback is that if they go to a private bank, they don’t have a similar — they don’t have an income-based repayment program like the government does. And they certainly don’t have loan forgiveness programs. So that’s something to keep in mind. But yeah, it’s just really about paying less interest to the banks or to the lenders and their decision to refinance.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I’m glad you said some of those nuances that you may not get with a private company, obviously loan forgiveness, the potential for income-based repayment plan. And I know we’ve talked about before on the show, but I’ll reference our listeners to our refinance page information where they can learn more, YourFinancialPharmacist.com/refinance. What is it? Who’s it for? You know, what could be the potential savings? Pros and cons? And then we also have refinance offers there as well. Now, what’s your advice to those that are refinancing their loans where there may be a situation, whether that be the bank requests or better off, with both incomes included, where you have both spouses names that are on the loan or if one cosigns the other. What are some of the concerns that you have in that type of situation?

Steven Chung: OK, here’s the thing. If a bank does that, I would run. I mean, it’s just — I think the main drawback is you don’t want to burn your spouse with a loan. I mean, unless you’re absolutely sure that the loans can be paid off and the bank is offering a much lower interest rate, if there’s a cosigner, I mean, I would just run. I mean, there’s so many banks out there, there’s so many lenders out there. I mean, not a lot specialize in student loans, but there’s enough to make it competitive. But if a bank just says, ‘OK, well, we want your spouse to cosign or someone else to cosign,’ then run. I mean, I’d only do it if there’s like absolutely no other choice. It just doesn’t make sense. I mean, there’s so many red flags there.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think that’s a good reminder, Steven. What we have seen, as we’ve said before on this show, this is a $1.5 trillion market, student loans. So there is lots of competition out there in the market, and we often encourage our listeners go out there, shop around, do your homework. These companies I will say seem to becoming more and more aligned with how competitive their offers are, but I don’t think don’t fall into the trap of just one offer, one option. Now, your article brought up an issue that I honestly had not previously considered, which is for those that live in community property states, refinancing pre-marriage student loans during marriage could convert it into a community debt where each spouse will be liable for half of the debt. Can you first explain what it means to be a community property state? And then talk about the impact that this situation could have.

Steven Chung: OK, a community property state, which includes California and a few other states, it just means that anything acquired during a marriage is split 50-50 between each spouses, each spouse. So in the sense of refinancing, there is the potential that refinancing a loan could mean that a loan acquired before marriage turns into a community debt. For practical concerns, it doesn’t have that much of an impact if they stay married. I mean, they’re still going to pay their loans. It’s not going to — I mean, the banks will still go after a person on title, but ultimately, I think where it becomes an issue is when there is a divorce and when if the court will deem the loan a community loan and it might impact how the ex-spouses have to pay the community — the refinanced loan, whether the original spouse is liable in full or do both spouses have to pay 50%. So that’s probably going to be the issue in these type of things.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s talk about that situation a little bit further with the very important disclaimer that we’re not here to provide legal advice and tax advice and every situation obviously can be different. We know we have people listening all over the country considering different state rules and nuances to each situation. But generally speaking, how does student debt get handled in a divorce situation in terms of shared liabilities? And what factors go into determining that?
Steven Chung: OK. Yeah, the thing is I’m not a family law attorney, so I’m not sure exactly how it works out in a divorce situation. And of course, 50 states have potentially 50 different rules, but the two nuances that kind of come up or at least — well, the big nuance where this might be an issue in a divorce is when, well, a couple gets married. One has no student loans and the other has a large amount of student loans. And then the first spouse offers to pay off the other spouse’s student loans. So in a divorce, what does that mean? Is that a gift to the other spouse? Or is it a loan that has to be paid back? So that’s kind of an issue that tends to come up in divorces. And then of course, even if there isn’t such a case, how would the loans be split? And would the couple have to pay their own loans? Or do they have to somehow pay the loans together? And usually, this situation comes up where a couple gets married and then one spouse during the marriage decides to get like a graduate degree or continues their education. But he needs student loan money to pay for basic living expenses like rent or things like that. So if that is the case, then chances are a divorce court judge will say that the couple collectively should pay a portion of the loans back and shouldn’t be responsible for — and shouldn’t just be responsible to whoever’s on the loan. So that’s kind of the issues that come up during divorce most frequently.

Tim Ulbrich: So my takeaways there are choose your spouse wisely and make sure you have open communication and conversations as far in advance as you possibly can. So let’s shift gears a little bit and talk about tax planning as it relates to student loans when we have two individuals that are involved. And again, important disclaimer, we’re not here to provide tax advice. And we certainly recommend they consult with a tax professional that can look at their personal situation in more detail. But it appears that the biggest consideration when it comes to student loans would be for those that are on an income-based repayment plan and determining whether it would be advantageous to file jointly or separately. What are some considerations here for our audience?

Steven Chung: OK. Let me add a third option and that’s just not getting married and living together. So they’ll just be filing single. But anyway, yeah, one of the things people have to look at when they’re on an income-based repayment plan is whether filing jointly will significantly increase their student loan payments. And of course, usually filing jointly, there is a small tax benefit. You’re usually in a smaller tax bracket. But let’s just say to make it simple you’re paying $10 more in student loans, but you’re saving $5 in taxes by filing jointly. Then you’re better off filing separately because even though you’re paying more in taxes, they’ll be paying even less in student loans, so that’s kind of. But usually for married couples who are both on income-based repayment plans or maybe one of them are, they should contact a tax preparer and have them do an analysis on what their tax situation will be if they file separately and then also look at what their student loan payments will be filing separately versus filing jointly. So and then make the comparison and then file the tax return on I guess whichever will save you the most money. And some people, like I said, there’s a third option. You could stay single. And interestingly, in California, you don’t even have to get married. You can actually choose to be a domestic partnership. I mean, that was an option given to homosexual couples before it became marriage was legalized. But now it seems to be making a comeback in people with large student loans. And this might be a viable option for them or just stay single altogether and just maybe live together, that kind of thing. The second biggest thing is — and this kind of could be down the road is when the income, when the loans are forgiven, that forgiven amount will be called cancellation of debt income. So it’s basically like the government kind of giving you — or somebody giving you money to pay off the loan, although you don’t actually get the money. Generally, there’s two things to consider. No. 1 is they tack the cancellation of debt income is based on your assets versus your liabilities. If your liabilities exceed your assets, then you’re considered insolvent and you will not be taxed on the forgiven debt. But if your assets exceed your liabilities, then a portion or maybe all of the forgiven debt could be taxable. Generally what I tend to tell people is don’t worry about it right now, especially if you’re just starting your careers. You know, maybe like the first 5-10 years, just focus on your career because you don’t want to live your life trying to plan for loan forgiveness. I mean, you’re pretty much throwing money away. And that’s kind of like putting the baby out with the bathwater, so to speak. So after the 5- or 10-year mark, once you kind of know what your salary will be, then you can possibly plan your finances to maximize insolvency or minimize your assets so you can minimize your taxes when loan forgiveness comes. The second thing to consider — and I think this is a very likely scenario — is that I think in about 10 years, that’s when I think the first income-based repayment forgiveness programs will begin. I think by the time, it’s probably not going to be taxed. The forgiveness is not going to be taxed. I think it’s just because a lot of potential candidates, especially Democrats, they are considering passing a law making forgiveness of debt income non-taxable. And as a precedent for that, back during the housing crisis when people were short selling their houses, the banks issued a cancellation of debt income on the amount that the banks lost or the amount of the mortgage that was forgiven, and then Congress immediately passed a law to make sure that the forgiven mortgage debt is non-taxable. So I think we’ll — I feel pretty good that there’s going to be something similar for student loan debtors when loan forgiveness comes. But just in case, I mean, you should probably make plans to maybe rearrange your assets, maybe lease or rent instead of buying, that kind of thing, at least around the time loan forgiveness happens. So yeah, so I think those kind of things you should consider.

Tim Ulbrich: Steven, let me ask you, you know, just this week I’m thinking about trying to reconcile this issue of where we may end up in five or 10 years when it comes to debt cancellation. You know, just this week, there’s news on both sides of it in terms of the Trump administration continuing to want to press forward with ending loan forgiveness and then obviously we have the campaign from the presidential Democratic candidates around debt cancellation, debt forgiveness and free college. And I think that often leaves people like in our community wondering, my gosh, what is the future of this going to be? What do I make of this? And how do I even begin to think and plan around it. And what I heard you say is you really feel like you think — obviously none of us have a crystal ball — but you think we’re going to move in that direction of not having that tax obligation based on some historical precedent. So tell me more about, you know, based on all that you have heard and based on your expertise in this area, tell me more about why you feel like that that’s the path that will go forward.

Steven Chung: OK. Well, the thing with Trump’s plan, he only calls for the removal of what they call the Public Service Loan Forgiveness. And that’s these student loan program where you work for the government or a nonprofit for 10 years and your loans are forgiven and without the cancellation of debt income.

Tim Ulbrich: Right.

Steven Chung: What he actually wanted to do was he wanted to simplify — there’s like several different IBR plans, and he wanted to simplify it into one 15-year plan. The thing is one 15-year plan for undergrads and then 30-year plan for graduate students. So he did not mention whether the loan cancellation will be forgiven. But let’s just say Trump’s proposal passes and loan forgiveness is not for another 30 years for people’s start. I mean, the way things are going now, the student loan numbers are just increasing. There’s no — I see no activity among students and schools to reduce it, to reduce tuition. I mean, just the cost of education is going up, and at some point, it’s just going to get to a point where people are going to be graduating with $300,000, $400,000, or even $500,000 debts. And I’m even starting to see that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Steven Chung: A few dentists, they’re even graduating like $700,000, $800,000 and even $1 million. There was one story in the Wall Street Journal, an orthodontist in Utah graduated with $1 million in debt. So I think with these numbers, I feel very good that this kind of relief is on the horizon. Of course, I’m not 100% sure, but I just feel good about it.

Tim Ulbrich: Sure.

Steven Chung: And it’s just going to affect so many people that there’s going to be a major outcry. And I think at that point, it’s just going to be a big — I mean, students and also their parents who also cosigned these loans will probably want them too. So there’s going to be an expanded voter base.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I’ve thought a lot about that too. You know, and again, we don’t know what the future will hold. But I think when you think about the vulnerability of the borrower, the focus on costs in higher education and the political outcry that would come from something like that, I think that all of those are important considerations. One of the takeaways I’ve had, Steven, from our time together, which I really appreciate you sharing your expertise, is we often talk on this show — and I know this is second nature for you, but I think here we are in tax season, so it’s a good reminder that we often think about filing our taxes, which it really is just a mechanical retrospective look at what happened. And I think this has been a great reminder on the need to be more strategic, more prospective and to be working with experts, you know, especially as we’re thinking about things like single filed married, and some of those situations when it comes to income-based repayment and thinking on more of a strategic standpoint based on your personal situation. So again, I appreciate your time and appreciate your sharing your expertise. We’re going to link to your article in the show notes as well as your bio. But just here as we wrap, where can our listeners go to connect with you and to learn more about the work that you’re doing?

Steven Chung: Well, I write for a legal website called Above the Law, and my columns appear on every Wednesday. In fact, I just released a column today, although it’s more about tax law and video games, so totally off-topic. I’m also on Twitter. My Twitter is @stevenchung. I just post occasional tax stuff, usually nonsense, but that’s a good way to contact me. Or you can connect with me on LinkedIn or if you’re in the southern California area, you can contact me. My phone number is (818) 925-4699. I’ll be happy to answer any questions about tax planning or filing tax returns, especially this time of year.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome, thank you. And again, to our listeners, Steven’s a tax attorney in Los Angeles, California. He helps people with basic tax planning and resolves tax disputes. He’s sympathetic to people with large student loans. Many of us can certainly sympathize with that as well. He can be reached via email. We’ll link to that in our show notes or as he mentioned, you can connect to him on Twitter. You’ll also find him writing for Above the Law and also on LinkedIn. Steven, thank you again for taking time to come on the show.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 140: How Ryan Is Bringing in $11,000 a Month Through College Town Real Estate Investing


How Ryan Is Bringing in $11,000 a Month Through College Town Real Estate Investing

Ryan Chaw, clinical pharmacist and real estate investor, joins Tim Ulbrich on the show. They talk about how Ryan was able to accelerate his financial goals through real estate investing and how he went from zero rentals and zero rental income to $10,755 per month from 18 tenants in four years.

About Today’s Guest

Ryan graduated with his Doctor of Pharmacy in 2015 at age 23.

He was inspired by his grandpa who bought 3 properties in the Bay and achieved financial independence for himself and was able to help cover college tuition for his grandchildren.

Ryan bought his first property in 2016. It was a single family home at his local college. He rented out the house per bedroom and renovated to add extra bedrooms to increase rental profit.

He repeated the same process for each property, buying 1 property each year. He then created a system for getting consistent high quality tenants, managing the tenants, and decreasing expenses through preventative maintenance. He now makes $10,755 per month in rental income.

Three of the properties are on 15 year mortgages and one is on a 10 year mortgage. Ryan took a HELOC out on the first house to help buy the 4th house.

Ryan is now teaching others his system: how to find a college town to invest near, analyzing a deal, generating tenant leads through strong marketing, and how to self-manage college tenants so everything is hands off and automated.

In his free time Ryan travels to many foreign countries to just absorb the culture and life outside of California. So far he has been to China, Japan, Taiwan, the Bahamas, Canada, Paris, London, Germany, and Mexico.

Summary

Ryan, a clinical pharmacist and real estate investor, quickly found his investing niche: college town real estate investing. Ryan started investing in real estate right after he graduated from the University of the Pacific. He now owns four single family homes in Stocktown, California, a college town, and has 18 tenants. By renting out each room individually, Ryan has maximized his income and brings in $10,755 per month.

Ryan’s grandfather owned a couple of rental properties in the Bay Area which not only funded his early retirement but also paid for Ryan and his brother’s college tuition. Ryan saw how impactful real estate investing could be and has the goal of reaching financial freedom so he’s able to do what he wants to do and provide for his family without money restricting his freedom.

Ryan purchased his first rental property in 2016 and has bought another single family home each year after. In high school, he worked a couple of jobs and saved all of that money in mutual funds. After 5 to 8 years, that money turned into $30,000. For his first rental property, he put around 25% down and took out a 10 year mortgage. He also worked overtime at his pharmacy job to help fund it. He purchased his first rental property for $262,000. Ryan receives $2,600 a month in rental income and has a $1,900 mortgage payment.

With the cash flow he brings in from his rental units, he makes sure his emergency fund is funded and averages that he’ll need about $100-200 in expenses monthly for each house. Ryan uses the leftover cash flow to fund his next property.

Ryan said that he thinks investing in student rentals in college towns can maximize your income the most in a single family home. Even though homes are expensive in California, he’s still able to have a cash flow from his properties. In this episode Ryan also discusses how he looks for tenants, handles complaints from tenants about other tenants, and how he built systems and processes.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. It is my pleasure to welcome Ryan Chaw onto the show to share his experiences with real estate investing. Now, as you know, we’ve mentioned real estate investing as a goal we have for 2020 in terms of bringing more information, more examples, more stories, to the YFP community. And today is another great one for you in this area. Ryan has a unique niche of real estate investing in California in college town real estate investing. He’s doing it well in a high cost of living area, and I think his work could translate well to other parts of the country. Furthermore, he is setting out to teach others his game plan and how real estate investing can help accelerate one’s path towards financial freedom. Ryan, welcome to the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast.

Ryan Chaw: How’s it going, Tim? I’m honored to be on the podcast.

Tim Ulbrich: Thank you so much. So glad that you reached out to me, really, really inspirational hearing the work that you’re doing. I’m excited to share that with our community as well. Let’s start with your career in pharmacy, and then we’ll dig into the real estate investing. Tell us a little bit more about your pathway into pharmacy, where you went to school and the work that you’re doing now.

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, so I graduated from the University of the Pacific in Stockton, California in 2015. Soon after that, I started working for RiteAid, and I did a part-time job at Kaiser and eventually ended up doing full-time at Kaiser. And now, I am an infectious disease pharmacist full-time at Kaiser. And from there, I just started investing in real estate. I saved up a lot for a down payment, I worked a lot of overtime, and I also had some money in mutual funds as well, so I just put 20% down on that first property in 2016 and then I rented out per room to college students to maximize my profits. Then I just bought one — I repeated the model. I just bought one each year, and now I’m at four single-family homes with 18 tenants and $10,755 in rental income.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s awesome. And we’re going to dig in to dissect that much further. You know, I think for people that are hearing that that are thinking about real estate investing, it can seem somewhat overwhelming why you went from just starting to, as I mentioned in the introduction, you just mentioned, four units, 18 tenants, roughly $11,000 of real estate income. And we’re going to talk about how you got from where you started to where you are today, really try to break down that plan. But tell us about the why, the inspiration. You know, where did your motivation come from to say, ‘I want to do real estate investing.’ And not even necessarily where you see the long-term, talk about that, but even to take that first ‘risk,’ that first step, that first property, what was the motivation and reason of doing that?

Ryan Chaw: I would say financial freedom, honestly. I just wanted freedom to kind of do what I would like with my life, have more flexibility in my life, be able to provide for my family down the line without having to worry about financials and have money restrict my freedom. So that was the goal for getting into this because eventually, this rental property portfolio will provide me passive income that will pay for all the bills and also allow me to, you know, take vacations, travel, and all of that.

Tim Ulbrich: And so, you know, as I think about your journey, your story, obviously you’re in a higher cost of living area, so you know, I don’t — as someone who is in Ohio, I think wow, real estate, California, crazy expensive, do the numbers even work? But tell me more. So I love the connection of financial freedom. But why real estate investing? I mean, other ways you could have just squirreled money and saved, you could have done other types of investing, you could have started a business. What was it specifically about real estate investing that really peaked your interest to use this as the vehicle to achieve that goal of financial freedom?

Ryan Chaw: I would say part of it actually is — because when I got to pharmacy, I wanted to provide a service for people. It’s the same idea for real estate investing. You’re providing a service for people. And I do interact with my tenants, and some of them I actually help out through the college because I actually went to UOPA as well. So just kind of giving back to that community is one reason why I did this. Another reason why is real estate investing is one of really the best ways to have true passive income and a good amount of it. If you were to invest in stocks, you would need to make — you would have to have like a several million dollar portfolio to get $10,000 a month in passive income in dividends. Right? But real estate, you can achieve it a lot faster, it’s truly a way to create generational wealth. I was actually inspired by my grandpa to get into it originally because he invested in a couple properties in the Bay area when they were cheap, right? And now they just went skyrocketed, right? So the rental income from that paid for not only his life in order for him to retire early but also paid for my college and that of my brother’s as well, so I really realized, this is a great way to create generational wealth.

Tim Ulbrich: I love that. So his experiences in doing real estate investing allowed you to get a jump start in terms of your financial plan by not having the massive debt load we see with lots of pharmacists, which allowed you to accelerate your savings. But even without the $170,000-200,000 of debt that we see with today’s graduate on average in the pharmacy world, I still don’t want to mitigate that it doesn’t mean there wasn’t hard work that was done to get to that first property. You know, often the objection I hear — and I know my wife Jess and I, we really felt like the hump of the first one is so difficult to get over, but for those that are listening or have listened to the Bigger Pockets podcast, they talk about this all the time of that first property, first property, you just got to do it. But I often hear as an objection — and there’s this disconnect between OK, I like the idea of real estate investing, I want to jump in, but my gosh, like where do I get the cash to even get started? So you talked a little bit about 2016, first property, 20% down, but talk to us, even before we analyze that property and that deal, talk to us about how you were able to save up money. What was the strategy that allowed you to have the cash flow to create the savings to get that 20% down?

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, so I actually worked a couple of jobs in high school during the summer. And I would put all my money, save it away rather than spend it into mutual funds at Edward Jones. And so that grew, that portfolio grew over the course of 5-8 years or so. And eventually when I took it out, it was around $30,000. So that was half of my down payment right there, plus I’m investing not in my directly local market, I’m investing in a city called Stockton, which is about an hour away from me in Sacramento. And the prices there for homes were around the $200,000s when I first started. Now, they’re around $300,000s. But compared to the price in Sacramento, you know, Sacramento costs $500,000 to buy a house. So for me, it made perfect sense, you know, I should just drive one hour away and create this system over in Stockton and then the cash flow would make a lot more sense. And yeah, that’s how I got started.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and what I heard there is hustle and sacrifice, you know. And that was really my next question for you. I think many people, especially our California community members, might be thinking, my gosh, it’s an uphill climb to even be able to afford your own personal property, let alone being able to put 20% down on a second one. So how have you reconciled that to be able to cover your own expenses as well as then obviously be in a position to invest?

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, so part of it was a little bit of luck. First property depreciated like crazy. I bought it for $262,000. And you know California, it depreciates like crazy. So it went up to $315,000.

Tim Ulbrich: Wow.

Ryan Chaw: I was able to take out a HELOC from that to basically help pay for each house down the line.

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Ryan Chaw: So yeah, that was one strategy I used.

Tim Ulbrich: And before we jump into more of that first property, are you living in one of the properties? Or what’s your situation to be able to cover your own personal living expenses?

Ryan Chaw: Oh yeah, great question. I actually do still — I have a great relationship with my family, so I do live with my parents. But you know, if I were to live outside, I would probably find a cheap, a very cheap place to rent, you know, nothing more than like $800 a month.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Ryan Chaw: But really, my real estate rents would cover that.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep. I love that, though. I mean, you think about the biggest barriers often and people getting started and this would obviously be their own housing expenses and student loans. And you’ve been able to overcome those barriers plus saving at a very early age, took advantage of compound growth, which allowed you to come up with a down payment, you got that first property, and then as you mentioned, you’ve got appreciation, you’re able to draw on the equity of that to be able to get into future properties. So first property, 2016, I think I heard you say $262,000? Is that correct?

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, $262,000.

Tim Ulbrich: OK. And it appreciated up to $315,000. So talk to us about just the numbers on that, roughly. You put 20% down. Talk to us about the rental situation and just so our listeners can get an idea of, you know, rental income coming in, your expenses and what those numbers look like.

Ryan Chaw: So the first house was basically a cookie-cutter property. It was a three-bed, two-bath, and what I do is I add extra bedrooms where I can. So I’ll either put up a wall or I’ll change an extra living room or family room into a bedroom where I can to maximize the profit because each room can rent out for like $600 a month. So for that house, I’m getting around $2,600 a month. And then for my mortgage payment, it’s $1,900 a month.

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Ryan Chaw: So that’s $700 in cash flow. And this is on a 15-year mortgage, actually a 10-year mortgage.

Tim Ulbrich: Wow, OK.

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, I actually — I think I put a little bit more, like 25% down, but I did, yeah, a 10-year mortgage and you know, by renting it out per room, it really maximizes that cash flow you can get from the house. And then basically from there, we just reinvest the cash flow into the next down payment, into the next one, into the next one, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. Tell our listeners about — a little bit more about why you decided a 10-year aggressive repayment versus a 15-, 20- or 30-year.

Ryan Chaw: I would say, you know, I did hear stories about overleveraging. So I wanted to start off a little bit safe, but then I realized it doesn’t really have to be that aggressive. I think another reason why is my end goal is financial freedom, so I want to pay them off as soon as I can because I want that passive, like complete passive income, you know, $10,755 per month coming in like period for the rest of your life.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I look at that example — this is a really good one. You know, you mentioned the rent at $2,600 a month across the tenants in that unit. And we’ll talk about the strategy and kind of the college town approach that gives you multiple renters. So $2,600 of rental income, $1,900 a month of a mortgage payment but that’s on a 10-year mortgage. So we fast forward 10 years, property is going to appreciate more, so the actual property will be worth a significant amount, which is a big impact on net worth. And then you get rid of a big part of that $1,900. Obviously, you’ll still have property tax, but you won’t have a mortgage payment. And in theory, rents will go up because of the market that you’re in and appreciation, all of these things. So I think hopefully our listeners start to put together the concept of the financial freedom. Break down a little bit further for me — I see in there $2,600 of rent, $1,900 of mortgage payment. I’m assuming that’s mortgage and taxes and insurance that’s in there as well. What would the rest of that $700, how do you reconcile that, you know — obviously you wouldn’t look at that as just being true profit because you’ve got other upkeep, vacancies, other expenses that you’re accounting for. So how do you determine, you know, what of that money, that $700 difference between $2,600 and $1,900, that you hold for those types of expenses? You know, versus that you account as more true profit?

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, so I always recommend having an emergency fund in case something breaks down, maybe $10,000-15,000 would be a good, reasonable emergency fund. I know some people say like six months emergency fund and all of that, but for me, you know, I do have my HELOC, so if I do have to use that, I can always take it out, which is — it’s basically like a credit card with a very low interest rate. So if I want to do that in an emergency, I could do that. But I would say my expenses are around maybe $200 or $100-200 a month or so average. But it really depends, a lot of times, things — because of the way I set up the house, things don’t break down too often. But when they break down, of course it’s a huge expenditure. And that’s what happened on my first house. I didn’t do my due diligence to make sure that everything was in working order before I bought it. And I made some mistakes, huge mistakes, actually. So one Monday, I got a call from a tenant who was saying, ‘Oh shoot, there’s sewage coming out the kitchen sink onto the kitchen floor.’ And this was like at 11 p.m. at night, right? I was like scrambling to call so many different plumbing companies, and it was hard to get ahold of someone because it was 11 p.m. at night to clean up the mess. So they had to put in a sump pump, they had to sanitize everything. That cost a couple thousand. And then we put a camera down the pipe, the sewage line, and then it was, you know, showed a lot of breaks in the pipes and routes in the pipes, so it cost me $6,000 to replace the whole sewage line.

Tim Ulbrich: Oh, gees.

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, it was crazy. So these things do come up, and they happen if you don’t do your due diligence. And so what I learned from that is during the escrow phase of the house, it’s very important to do a sewage line inspection. So that’s just sticking a camera down the sewage line, costs $200-300, but you know, they’ll find all the breaks, all the cracks and grooves in your pipes if there are any, and then you can use that as a negotiating point during the sale. Either have the seller repair it or have the seller cut a check for you to hire someone to repair it.

Tim Ulbrich: I love that, especially when you consider the cost of something like that, of the repair relative to the cost of the preventative, more diagnostic approach. So that’s great, great, great advice.

Ryan Chaw: Exactly. And I also learned not to buy houses that are over 100 years old when I can because that first house was like 100 years old. Crazy.

Tim Ulbrich: So you know, in California, knowing that you have multiple tenants, you’re in a college town — and again, we’ll talk about that more here in a little bit — do you not have to be as concerned about vacancy rates, you know, that you might see in other parts of the country? Or how do you think through vacancy?

Ryan Chaw: Correct. So I do one-year leases for all of my rooms, all of my 18 tenants. And it’s because the demand is so high for off-campus housing, I only charge $600 a month, right? And on-campus dormitories, they charge $1,000-1,200. So that makes sense for a lot of people. You’re getting more privacy, you’re getting a lot more space, right? And just more freedom in general, right? So a lot of people like that and they see that as a good — for them, a good place to stay. And I usually target third- or fourth-year students when I can. Sometimes I have second-year students stay. I rarely have first-year students stay because of the maturity level. Most of them, they’re already in professional school, pharmacy school, right, so they take — I mean, they mainly use the house to study and sleep.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Ryan Chaw: To be honest, yeah. And not only that, the parents kind of visit them and they help clean up the house, so I cut down on the cleaning costs and all of that too. And so yeah, I do one-year lease. They can always sublease during the summer. Some schools like pharmacy school and dental school, they go year-round, so they actually go through summer. So it makes sense for them to do a one.

Tim Ulbrich: I love that. You know, the two objections I’ve commonly heard for college town real estate investing would be the summer period, but obviously you mentioned the one-year lease and the allowance of subleases or programs that have year-round type of offerings, as well as the potential damage and upkeep for a variety of reasons, you know, maturity and so forth and working with professional students — not that it’s immune to that, but obviously you have a lot better chance I think that they’re going to take care of the property and as many pharmacy students know, pharmacy is a small world, and you should be respectful, right, of somebody else’s property. So talk to us about the strategy of college town investing. I think that’s really the niche you’ve built here. And I think it’s really cool. You know, why? How? And what’s been the strategy that this is an area that you want to continue to go into further?

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, so I was first inspired by actually my friend who did this, his aunt basically bought a property right across the street from campus and rented it out to my friend’s friends. And so my friend basically lived there for free. In fact, if I were to go back, I would do the same strategy because for house hacking where you stay in the house, you can actually put down as low as 3.5% down, so I would have even started with that. But I guess I went into student rentals mainly — like I did examine the different tenant pools out there, but really, student rentals is the best way to maximize your profit on the single-family home because of that you’re renting out per room idea. So one of my houses, for example, appraised to rent out for $2,000. They estimated $2,000 in market rent, right? But I was actually — after I added the bedrooms, I was able to get $3,100 a month. So that house, you know, an extra $1,100 every month made a huge difference in my bottom line. And that’s how I’m able to invest in California where the rental rates — I mean, sorry, the housing prices are so high. If you were to do this in other states, you could get the same rent by $500-700 and the price of the properties are only hundreds of thousand — like $100,000 or $200,000. So the cash flow is tremendous. And that’s why I’m helping others and teaching others how to do this strategy because it’s really a great opportunity, especially in other states.

Tim Ulbrich: And it sounds like, you know, I’m guessing some of our listeners may be thinking about, hey, here we are in a really great, you know, 10-11 year run in the market.

Ryan Chaw: Oh yeah. They get the history, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, what happens to Ryan if this thing flips on its head? But a few things that I think you’ve done really well to protect yourself against that, obviously, it sounds like you’ve purchased properties at a good price point. You’re in a market that’s going to continue to have demand, regardless of what happens. Obviously being in a college town, you’ve got multiple tenants. You’ve built these year-long leases. But also, you’ve got some of your properties — I don’t know if you have all of them on a 10-year, but because you’ve done that and they’ve appraised and you’ve paid off a significant amount I’m guessing of some of those mortgages on a shorter time period, even that one you purchased in 2016, you’re essentially 3+ years in, so you’ve got this cushion with 20% down and this equity built in that even if housing prices go down, let’s say 10-20% overnight, you’ve really got some protection built in there, right?

Ryan Chaw: Oh yeah. For sure. They say you make your money when you buy, right? So I’ve got to make sure I look at several — oh, let’s say maybe 50 deals or so — just throughout the year. And I buy the best one, right? I constantly look at deals so I know what a good deal looks like. So that’s pretty key.

Tim Ulbrich: And what about getting tenants? What’s been your strategy of having a funnel of people that come to you? And I’m guessing this in part has to do with the relationships that you have. But how have you done that I guess initially? And then is there a point where, you know, after you have a good reputation with these students that I think it would be somewhat of a word-of-mouth of kind of passing it, you know, off to the next group that’s coming after they graduate?

Ryan Chaw: Yeah. Exactly. Nowadays, it’s word of mouth. But when I first started out, I did three things: I put signs or fliers up on the campus bulletin boards. That actually worked pretty well. I put a “For Rent” sign on my lawn. I mean, that’s usually how everyone starts out. That actually got me a lot of calls, but they weren’t from students. They were usually from people around the area. And then when I said, “Well, if you were to rent out the whole house, it would be $3,100 a month,” they’re like, “That’s crazy.” So usually, I would get some not very well qualified tenants to that. But then what really helped was the Facebook groups. All campuses have these Facebook groups for off-campus, there’s usually a textbook exchange group, there’s Class of 2020, you know, all these groups. I go onto them, and I write my targeted ads, right? I say, “Hey, we have this place that’s three minutes from campus.” I literally put up the map on there and show them where it’s at relative to their classes. And I get — I would say every time I post an ad, within the first three days, I would get like 10-12 people contacting me. No kidding, this is pretty average.

Tim Ulbrich: Wow.

Ryan Chaw: Yeah. So there’s a lot of people interested. It’s a huge market. You think about it, UOP I think has 7,000 students or so. I only need 18 of those. That’s like .1% of them, right? So yeah. It’s a great market.

Tim Ulbrich: Let me pick your brain on process. You know, as I’m hearing this — and I’m guessing our listeners as well — I hear you talk about things like advertising your properties and responding to interest and dealing with the sewage pipe issues at 11 o’clock at night and having to think about the strategy of finding these deals and you casually talk about adding rooms and putting up walls. And I’m guessing many people are like, oh my gosh, I just can’t even wrap my mind around —

Ryan Chaw: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: — how to process this. Tell me a little bit about your process, your team, what you’re doing versus maybe other things that you’ve really leaned on others to do.

Ryan Chaw: Yeah. So yeah, putting the systems and processes in place is key, so I’m glad you mentioned that. So I have a process for everything. Rental payment, I do through Zell. I require them to use an app called Zell. It’s a direct deposit app, so I don’t have to deal with a check being lost in the mail, right? And it tells you exactly when they pay their rent so I know when they’re late or not so I can charge the late fee if they’re late. Just putting everything in the lease, being very clear, having all clear, set terms and the wordings clear for any potential issues that could arise. Then you just refer back to the lease when the issue happens. I also have a system in place for like managing the properties if something breaks down. So if something breaks down, the tenant will typically send me a text. They’ll say the toilets not working. And so what I do is I just forward the text to my contractors. And I have a team of three contractors. One of them is more creative, he’s the one I use to help build walls and maybe create a hallway if I have to. He’s the creative guy. The other two, they’re more for like run-of-the-mill things like replacing a toilet, putting in a sump pump, things like that. But basically, I just forward a text to them. And then they let themselves in with the electronic lock on the door. So they just put in that code, right, let themselves in, do their job, they go home, and then I have someone else take a look at the work. And they just tell me, yeah, he fixed the toilet or whatever. And then he sends me the bill, and I send him the check. That’s it.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. Awesome.

Ryan Chaw: You know, I haven’t been down to Stockton in over seven months now. Right? So it’s great. Everything’s pretty automated.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think it’s hopefully an encouragement, you know, to me, to our audience, that the systems, the processes, you’ve built a lot of this, I can tell, over time. And as I talk about, again, they mention all the time on Bigger Pockets, really not hearing stories like this and feeling overwhelmed but just thinking about that first process. And there will be mistakes, you know, that’s part of the learning.

Ryan Chaw: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: And really figuring out what the system and process, figuring out what you want to do yourself, what you want to hire out, what capacity you have time-wise, what’s the margins on the properties, you know, all of those things are really important. Now, considering your model where you have several tenants in a property, several students, I have to imagine you run into tenant issues, you know, just by nature of having people involved, probably often even between one another. Tell me about the issues that come up and how you handle those and deal with those.

Ryan Chaw: Great question, Tim. Yeah, so sometimes, you’ll get tenants complaining about other tenants about noise, maybe the other tenants smoking pot or something like that. And what you do, what I learned, actually — and I learned this the hard way — is you want to have the tenant talk to the other tenant face-to-face. Because if I go and call that other tenant, say, ‘Hey, this other guy complained about you,’ then the situation gets worse because the guy is saying, ‘Hey, you talked behind my back. I can’t trust this guy.’ So the situation actually escalates if you do that. So first, have them have a face-to-face discussion. And then if there’s still issues, then you can call up the tenant personally. And then if that still doesn’t work, you can call the parent because all these college students, they have parents, right? And usually after you call the parent, it gets straightened out pretty quickly. But I’ve only had to resort to calling the parent one time throughout my four years of investing. And most of the times, as long as you empower — and that’s the key. You have to empower the tenants that they’re adults now, they need to resolve these issues face-to-face with the other tenants. And once they kind of have that — once you empower them, then the issues get resolved very quickly. In fact, that’s all I have to do nowadays is just I’ll ask them to talk face-to-face. And after that, I don’t get any texts or phone calls or messages or anything like that.

Tim Ulbrich: I think that’s great advice. I didn’t learn that lesson in the real estate world. I learned that lesson in the academic pharmacy in terms of managing other individuals. But I think you’re spot-on. I mean, the second two individuals have an issue with one another and you jump in with one of them but they don’t talk face-to-face, things often get worse in the short term.

Ryan Chaw: Yes.

Tim Ulbrich: And even though the difficult conversation is difficult, it’s important to be had. What resources would you recommend to our listeners that are hearing this and saying, ‘Wow, I’m really inspired by Ryan’s story. I’m interested, I want to learn more.’ Podcasts, books, blogs, what is out there that you draw information from?

Ryan Chaw: Yeah, so Bigger Pockets actually has some great books on rental property investing to get you started. There’s one by Brandon Turner I think on rental property investing. But there’s also some great books for like mindset and kind of theory as well. I would say “The Millionaire Real Estate Investor” by Gary Keller is really good. That one teaches you how to build your teams and forms of that, of creating systems in place. There’s also “Rich Dad, Poor Dad,” of course. That’s a very inspirational book if you guys haven’t read that one. “Think and Grow Rich,” there’s “The Miracle Morning.”

Tim Ulbrich: Great book.

Ryan Chaw: I like that one. That was a great book, yeah, exactly. It teaches you how to take charge of your day. You know, journaling, meditation, those types of things to get your mind in the right place to really handle stressful situations if something comes up.

Tim Ulbrich: I’m really glad you gave some books that were around kind of more of the mindset, you know, morning routine types of things because I think while the x’s and o’s are important, the theme that I’ve now heard as we’re now 140-something episodes into the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast is, you know, those interviews that I reflect on afterwards and say, “Wow, there’s just something really special, something different, something unique in terms of how somebody’s operating, how they’re growing what they’re doing,” the consistent theme I see with you and others that I would say are really, really successful is this concept of mindset. And it’s just different. And I think it’s often this constant quench and desire to learn and to grow and naturally from that, you will see growth that will happen in a variety of areas. It could be business, it could be family, it could be many different things. So I know that you are kind of in this phase where you’re beginning to teach others how to do this, which I think is really cool. So tell us a little bit about that, you know, kind of what your vision is for that, and where our listeners can go to connect with you and learn more.

Ryan Chaw: Oh yeah, for sure. So I believe student housing — the student rental market is the best way to invest in single-family homes, hands down, because you can make the most profit. So I’m teaching others how to do this. I walk them through the whole deal analysis process to make sure everyone gets a good deal. I walk them through the renovations we make. We try to of course eliminate, do preventative maintenance for possible — like eliminating grass and replacing old mulch and cutting out trees and trimming branches and all of that. And then I walk them through the whole marketing process to get tenants in consistently and to screen them and how to manage issues down the line. And they can reach me at — or you guys can reach me at www.newbierealestateinvesting.com. That’s www.newbierealestateinvesting.com. And newbie is spelled newbie. And I have some great resources, you guys can put in, sign up for the newsletter, and I’ll send you some great information. I even have like a deal analysis calculator you guys can take a look at. It’s kind of like the Bigger Pockets one, but it’s more simplified and it has an amortization schedule and everything. And then I also have a great resource you can read through on the different areas of real estate investing because it’s not just student rental housing. Of course, I love that area. But there’s also fixing, flipping, there’s Airbnb, which is also known as short-term rentals. There’s apartments. But really, I think most people, the ones who aren’t millionaires or billionaires or whatever, the best place to start really is single-family housing and just doing the renting out per bedroom house hacking strategy.

Tim Ulbrich: Great stuff, Ryan. I really appreciate you taking the time, and I have a feeling this won’t be the first time that our audience will hear from you. So excited to see what comes for you in the future and as I mentioned to the community, we’re going to keep bringing more examples, stories, hopeful that will give our community some ideas of things to think about. I think this is another great example of a pharmacist who’s doing some really incredible things and is successful. So congratulations on the success that you’ve had. And thank you again for taking time to come on the show.

Ryan Chaw: Hey, thank you, Tim. I’m excited to be able to get on your podcast. Thank you.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. And as always, if you like what you heard on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, please leave us a rating and review on Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to your podcasts each and every week. We appreciate you joining us. Have a great rest of your week.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 139: Should You Refinance Your Mortgage?


Should You Refinance Your Mortgage?

Nate Hedrick, the Real Estate RPh, joins Tim Ulbrich to talk about all things mortgage refinancing. They talk about what it is, how to qualify, the costs associated with refinancing a mortgage, how to determine the break even point and how Nate recently evaluated his own mortgage refinance.

About Today’s Guest

Nate Hedrick is a 2013 graduate of Ohio Northern University. By day, he is a clinical pharmacist and program advisor for Medical Mutual. By night and weekend, he works with pharmacists to buy, sell, flip, or rent homes as a licensed real estate agent with Berkshire Hathaway in Cleveland, Ohio. He has helped dozens of pharmacists achieve their goal of owning a house and is the founder of www.RealEstateRPH.com, a real estate blog that covers everything from first-time home buying to real estate investing.

Summary

Nate Hedrick, the Real Estate RPh, is back on the podcast to discuss mortgage refinancing. Nate explains that a mortgage is a bank or lender giving you money to pay for a home and you, the borrower, have a certain amount of time (term) to pay that money back. In mortgage refinancing a lender or bank gives the leftover amount to pay the existing mortgage off and you get a brand new one which essentially resets your loan. It’s possible to refinance your mortgage with the same lender. People chose to refinance their mortgage to reduce their monthly payment, reduce overall interest, get better equity in their home if the house went up in value, eliminate PMI or to reduce the term of the loan.

You likely qualify for a mortgage refinance if you already have a mortgage. To get a good refinance offer, three categories will be looked at: the equity in your home, credit score, and other debt load.

Since this is a new mortgage, you’ll incur the same costs as you did when you purchased your home (closing costs, title fees, etc). Nate cautions that advertisements for no closing costs may not be completely truthful as those costs might be rolled into the loan which you’ll end up paying interest on.

To figure out if mortgage refinancing makes sense for your situation, you have to know your current interest rate and monthly payment, what that rate and payment will change to, what your overall payment is going to be and how long you are going to live in that house. The length you’ll be in your house is really important to consider when looking at refinancing depending on the amount of closing costs you’ll have to pay with your new mortgage.

Nate and Tim suggest exploring several lenders and banks if you’re considering refinancing your mortgage. YFP recently partnered with Credible for mortgage refinancing. You can compare up to 6 lenders at a time and receive quotes in under 5 minutes. Click here to compare multiple lenders with Credible.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Excited to be here and to welcome back Nate Hedrick, the Real Estate RPH, as we talk about mortgage refinancing, including Nate’s own experiences, and we’ll talk about a question we’ve had from a listener, a community member, as well. So Nate, welcome back to the show.

Nate Hedrick: Thanks, Tim. Nice to be here.

Tim Ulbrich: So I was doing some accounting this morning. I think you officially now may have the record for the number of times you’ve appeared on the podcast. So we’re excited to have you back.

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, I expect my championship belt to be sent in the mail as well. I’ll give you my address after this.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. So we’ve talked before. We know how things can get expensive. We’ve done episodes before on home buying, we know of course there’s lots to consider. We did a previous episode on all costs involved in home buying, evaluating the rent versus the buy. It’s not just the mortgage payment, of course it’s the taxes, the insurance, the HOA fees, utilities, etc. And you know, for our listeners, when it comes to the mortgage and how much of a factor that can play in your overall financial plan, it typically is a big chunk of their monthly budget. And unless you move or downsize, many of these costs that come along with home buying are things that you can’t change. However, one thing that you might be able to change is the interest rate. And that can be accomplished through a refinance, which we’re going to talk about here today. So Nate, here we are, 2020, and I think we take for granted rates today in 2020. But rates have not always been where they are today. So just give us a quick history lesson on kind of mortgage interest rates and probably for many of us, what our parents were dealing with back in the early ‘80s.

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, it’s funny. This is something that I actually learned in real estate classes and for some reason, never knew up until that point. But for years, even if you look 30 years ago, early ‘80s, end of the ‘70s, interest rates were like credit cards for houses. I mean, you’re talking 15%, 16%, 17%, 18% for a mortgage, which just — it feels absolutely crazy in today’s world. I mean, we’re at 3.5%, roughly 4% on prime, so that is such a huge difference for us. And it’s something that I don’t think a lot of people even realize if you’re in our generation.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I think so too. And so here we are, as you mentioned, rates, depending on the term, depending on a whole host of factors, which we’ll talk about here today, much, much, much lower, whether that’s 3.5%, 4%, 4.5%, it’s still notably lower than interest rates that were in the teens. And I always give my parents a hard time, ‘Yes, you dealt with that. But also, let’s look at the prices of homes back at that time period.’ So basic definition, mortgage refinancing, what is it in terms of basic things our listeners should know before we talk about the reasons and the hows and all the qualifying factors.

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, absolutely. So a mortgage in itself is just basically the bank giving you money or a lender giving you money to pay for a house. And you have some term to pay that back, whether it’s a 15-year, a 30-year or something in between, you’ve got a period of time which to pay that back. Well, the mortgage refinance is effectively a resetting of that loan. You’ve either got the same lender or a different lender who is giving you the money to cover the leftover amount you have on your current mortgage, and you get a brand new one. And that can be the exact same term, that can be an extended term, a shortened term. There’s all different ways to do it. And we can talk about those details, but effectively, it’s a reset of that loan.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. And I think for many folks listening, especially with the rates where they are at today, most notably, we think of a refinance to reduce your monthly payment, reduce the overall interest that you pay over the course of the loan, but what else is out there? Why might somebody refinance beyond those two factors?

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, the ones that I see a lot too are your house has gone up in value, so you actually want to get a better equity on that property so you can actually get more cash back out of your property itself. You can use it to eliminate PMI, that’s actually why my wife and I did it. And we can talk through that, but we actually wanted to get rid of PMI, and it was the easiest way for us to do that. You can actually just reduce the loan term. Maybe if you’re really driving toward that FIRE movement like we’ve been talking about and you want to get that paid down that much faster, you can reduce the actual loan term to a reduced interest rate and a number of other things to basically get that paid off that much faster.

Tim Ulbrich: So if we have somebody listening, you know, I’m going to give them my situation for Jess and I. We moved here to Columbus fall 2018. You know, interest rates really were at — I say ‘peak,’ but again, if we consider this historically, peak is a relative term. But at the time, we got a 30-year mortgage for 6.25% was our interest rate, wasn’t too long ago. And here we are again with rates lower than that. So I’m guessing many of our listeners are thinking, OK, maybe I’ve got a rate where this makes sense. And we’ll talk about how you evaluate whether or not that makes sense and where the break-even is. But how does one qualify? And what are the steps that are involved that if somebody’s thinking or finding themselves in a similar situation, to determine if this is for me, how do I begin that qualification process?

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, so if you currently have a mortgage, you pretty much automatically qualify for a refinance. The tricks to how you get a good refinance come down to a number of factors. So one is the equity in your home. That’s probably the most important factor, quite honestly. Most lenders are going to ask you that up front. So what is your current loan, basically? So if you took out a 90% loan, basically you put 10% down on your house a year ago, you probably haven’t built up a lot of equity in that home, right? You’ve been paying it off for a year, but most of those payments are going toward interest, not toward principal. And the actual equity you have, the ability to refinance probably hasn’t changed very much. There’s not been enough time for it to go up in value. And similarly, you haven’t been able to pay down the debt that you have. So that really is the key factor. How much equity do you have in the home right now? And how has that changed from your original loan? That’s kind of step one. The next thing is going to be based on like your credit score. So if you’ve got a better credit score, you’re going to qualify for better rates. So if you’ve bought the house five years ago, let’s say, and your credit score has gone up 100 points since then, you may qualify for very different rates than you did just that five years ago. So that’s a question to kind of ask yourself. And then beyond that too, it’s just what other factors are going into it? Do you have other debtload that the lender should be concerned about? It’s basically all the questions they ask you on an original mortgage and making sure that you’re a qualified candidate for that original mortgage again.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think that’s where for so many of our listeners, you know, we think of the life stage that often pharmacists, especially new practitioners, are in in terms of so many variables changing where, you know, income may have gone up, credit scores may have gone better, other debt has come down, perhaps they’ve paid down some of their mortgage. And obviously, that would make them more favorable, depending on the personal situation. The one thing, Nate, I’ve seen a little bit — and I don’t know if you’ve run into this — is especially recently as some markets have gotten really hot, if people got into bidding wars on a home where they, you know, were making just crazy offers, well above whatever was kind of market value at the time, and depending on what’s happened in those markets since then and how long it’s been, the appraisal process is going to be very important here to determine what that equity position is, correct?

Nate Hedrick: Absolutely. Yeah, the appraisal’s really what it all comes down to, and that’s effectively the bank sending someone to your home or sometimes they do a desktop appraisal where they’re researching it online only and not actually driving out. But they’re determining what is the market value of your home? There’s no one else bidding on it, right? You’re not actually up for sale. So they have to kind of use other area comps to determine what is the effective value of your home? And we’re going to base our loan on that amount.

Tim Ulbrich: My favorite appraisal story recently, I think I shared this with you, as Jess and I are looking at the refi process — we’re actually in the middle of this right now — is about six months ago, we got a HELOC on the home as we were looking at doing some real estate investing, and we haven’t done anything with it. But at that time, as a part of that, we got an appraisal done. And that came in at $10,000 less than we actually purchased the home. And now as we’re going through the mortgage refinance, you know, it was at our local credit union that I work with. And obviously as lending has become a little bit looser here again in 2020, couple quick pushes of the button on the computer and that appraisal is $40,000 different than the one on the HELOC. Same institution.

Nate Hedrick: Sounds about right.

Tim Ulbrich: And that came out $30,000 higher than we purchased the home. So I think that just speaks to some of the variability you see in the appraisal process.

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, a lot of that speaks to too basically how the banks make their money and how they want to get those loans, right? It’s better to have you in there for a long time. A HELOC is kind of boring to them, so they’re not going to appraise it very competitively.

Tim Ulbrich: But we like to think it’s objective, right? So.

Nate Hedrick: Exactly.

Tim Ulbrich: So let’s talk about costs. I think this is certainly top of mind for folks. You know, of course we can look at it and say, hopefully we get a lower monthly payment, hopefully we’ll reduce the amount we pay over the life of the loan, lots of commercials out there advertising no closing costs. And if somebody goes out and starts to shop, you see a wide range of what’s advertised as $0 closing costs to, as we’ll share an example here from a listener, question what can be fairly significant closing costs. So what are the reason for the differences? And what are some of the costs that are involved in a refinance process?

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, so like I said at the beginning, this is effectively a new mortgage. You’re resetting the button on your actual debt. So the banks and the lenders are going to treat it just the same way. So there’s the same level of closing costs, the same level of effort. They’ve got appraisals, they have to pay for title fees and all sorts of things that need to be taken care of. And while it feels like it should be less because you already live in the house and you already have the title and all that stuff, a lot of those things still persist. So just like when you get a regular mortgage, you will actually get basically a good faith estimate that will lay out all of those costs and what it’s going to be. Now, you talked about no closing costs. And there are some situations where there are truly no closing costs. But a lot of times what that means is that no direct out-of-pocket closing costs. They’re going to roll them into the loan. So if you have $5,000 in closing costs and your current mortgage is $180,000, well, your new mortgage would be at $185,000. And the idea is you just roll that into the loan, you’ll figure it out with interest later. So those closing costs advertisements can be a little bit misleading at times.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And I think that’s such an important point. I’m glad you brought that up is really making sure you’re digging into that good faith estimate and doing your homework to understand what exactly are the individual line item charges, especially — as we’ll talk about in a moment — if you’re comparing multiple offers, getting as close to an apples-to-apples comparison as you can and really understanding what are you paying for now versus what’s being rolled into the mortgage, which ultimately you’re going to pay back with interest, you know, along the way, which may not be a bad thing. It’s just you have to be aware of what you’re working on and weighing how much you want to pay out of pocket versus how much you want to roll into the loan. So to your point, you’re resetting the mortgage, so think of it as somebody who’s buying a home for the first time, all those closing costs, again, you’re going to be evaluating and hopefully something you’re preparing. So I’m somebody listening, Nate, and I’m looking at a situation where OK, maybe I’ve got a 30-year mortgage at 4.5%, I’ve paid off two years, let’s say, 28 years left of a 30-year term, I hear that rates are lower, I’m listening to this podcast, how do I determine whether or not this makes sense? Talk me through how do you think through this process?

Nate Hedrick: Absolutely. So just like when we go to buy a house, right, I recommend all my clients shop around for a couple different mortgages. Right now, lenders are chomping at the bit to get you to refinance with them, even if it’s — this is ridiculous — but even if it’s the current lender you have, they can’t wait to refinance your loan, right? They just want you to secure your business as long as they can. So you give a call to a local branch or a lender that you know or a lender that your listing agent has recommended, anything like that, and they’ll immediately be like, ‘Oh yeah, refinance, let me get you to our refinance department. Here’s our refinancing guy,’ or what have you. And so they’ll be able to tell you quite quickly, you know, based on a 10-question survey that they’ll have over the phone with you, ‘Here’s what we expect your rate to be, here’s what some of the breakdown of what you’d actually pay in closing costs,’ I mean, I called up when we did our refinance, I called up three different lenders and within, I mean, within an hour, all three of those lenders had gotten me a reasonable result of what I was going to be able to refinance with.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. Yeah, and I did the same thing. So you know, I actually reached out to the institution that currently holds our mortgage, and to your point, I think I get something in the mail every three days from them. I haven’t got any phone calls, but I get lots of mail from the current lender. So I reached out to them, I used the Credible tool that we have on the site, which I’ll talk about at the end, and then I went through our local credit union that I’ve done other business with. And I wanted to just see both experience-wise as well as rate-wise and again, trying to compare some of those costs what’s involved as well. And three very, very different experiences. And I think it speaks to the value of making sure you shop around, just like we talk about with many other things on this show, life insurance, disability, professional liability, etc. So breakeven, how do I figure out does the math make sense on this? So instead of just looking at here’s my current rate, here’s my new rate, here’s my current monthly payment, here’s the future monthly payment under refinance. That’s a good start but one shouldn’t stop there, right? So how do I determine whether or not this makes sense and ultimately get to a breakeven point?

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, so the trick is to know your numbers up front. You have to know what your current interest rate is and what you’re actually paying monthly. And then once you start getting these quotes and start talking to these lenders, you’ll have new data to basically plug into that chart and be able to say, OK, if we’re at 4.5% now and we’re at 3.5% later, what is our monthly payment going to go down to? Or perhaps if I am changing my loan term, what is my monthly payment going to go up to or change to or whatever the case is going to be? But what does that look like? What’s that difference? And is my overall payment going to be lower, my overall interest payment over the life of that loan going to be better? Now, most people, not everybody, but most people don’t live the entire 30 years in one house, right? Most people move on. So the other question is how long am I going to live here? Because if you’re saving $1,000 a year, but the closing costs are $8,000, you better be there at least eight more years for it to make actual sense. So that’s a really important question. I think no matter what you’re doing, the breakeven analysis is how long am I going to be here to basically make up that difference in terms of the costs up front versus the costs saved over the course of years?

Tim Ulbrich: So I think that’s a great way of thinking about how long am I going to be here? And I’m looking at the math, right? So if you’re going to save let’s say $200 a month, taking that figure and then looking at the closing costs, let’s say your closing costs are $3,000, your $200 a month, how long does that $200 a month have to be saved ‘til you get to that breakeven of $3,000? But also looking at, as you mentioned, the total amount of interest, the total payout over the life of the loan. One of the most common things, Nate, that I think I see and I’m sure you see often talking with individuals is somebody who maybe started with a 30-year, they now are let’s say 26 years left, and they go to refinance and they reup a 30-year, so they restart the clock, but they only focus on the monthly payment, right? And they don’t consider the fact that they’re then going to extend the loan another four years, which is the progress that they’ve already made. Correct?

Nate Hedrick: I see people doing this with student loans too.

Tim Ulbrich: That’s right

Nate Hedrick: And you guys have more experience than I do, right? They say, ‘Oh, look at my payment’s lower, this is fantastic. Yeah, my interest rate is lower too. I’m sure it’s great.’ They’ve gone from having three years left to now jumping back to 10 years of loan payments. The overall interest paid over that life is tens of thousands of dollars more, potentially. So you have to factor all three of those things in.

Tim Ulbrich: So I think this is where I would encourage our audience to nerd out, create a spreadsheet, right? So you know what I did, as I mentioned, three different institutions, so I worked with my current lender, worked with Credible, which is then shopping around multiple options, which I’ll reference here in more detail in a moment, and then the credit union. But within each one of those, you’re then going to get different options in terms of 30-year, 20-year, 15-year term. And then even within those, you’re going to have different options that range in terms of whether or not you purchase points. So I think I ended up with the spreadsheet of, I don’t know, 20 or 30 different fields, trying to figure out not only what would that be in terms of monthly payment but then also looking at over the totality to try to determine, OK, if I were to continue on this path as is today, how much would be out-of-pocket? And then how would that work out with each one of these? What about the other side of this, Nate? So somebody who let’s say has a 30-year term right now, maybe they’ve got 26 years left to pay and they’re thinking, maybe I’m going to go down to a 15- or a 20-year, how do you think about this from an opportunity cost standpoint? Because on one hand, somebody might say, ‘Well, this is great. I’m going to save x dollars in interest,’ which they could calculate. On the other hand, they might say, ‘You know, do I really want to be making extra payments when rates are so low? Even if I can save interest, could I be using that money elsewhere?’ Talk us through your thought process there.

Nate Hedrick: Yeah. It’s a great question. It all comes down to kind of what your financial goal is, right? Do you want to be throwing extra money at your mortgage right now? Or are you saving that for something else? Maybe it’s more investing or investing in properties or whatever the case may be. So yeah, it’s a good question. It’s going to be different for everybody, but when we looked at it, actually, we had a 30-year rate when we did our refinance. And we took it down to a 15-year because the amount we saved in interest made our payment not that much different. So for us, it was like, well, we’ll just take 10 years off this mortgage to keep paying effectively what we’re paying now. But we’ll know that we’re saving money in the long-term of the interest paid. It was a feel-good thing for us. And sometimes that’s a better driver than crunching all the numbers.

Tim Ulbrich: You know, this reminds me too, Jess and I were recently talking about this as we were looking at, hey, maybe we go down to a 20- or 15-year, and then of course you have the conversation of OK, what pressure is this higher monthly payment going to put on our financial plan? How much margin do we have? You know, do you have a good emergency fund? All the things we talk about on the show. But might there be any life variables that will change that could either increase or decrease that pressure on your margin, right? So you know, I’m thinking of things like potential job loss or could go the other way, a promotion or addition in terms of children to the family or maybe you have children that are moving out of the household and you have more margin. So it can go either way. And I think the conversation that is so common, just like it is with student loans, is it’s easy to say, ‘Well, let’s just opt for the 30-year, the longer term, and then we’ll make extra payments.’ And not suggesting that’s a bad move whatsoever, obviously it depends on your personal situation. I would just challenge, you know, what’s the reality of that happening when push comes to shove? And I think for some, there’s value in kind of forcing that hand with the more aggressive payment whereas for others, that’s not the move to make. So you’ve got to really take a step back and say, behaviorally, what do we need for our plan? How much margin do we have or not have? Would this put us in a tight position? Do we need that type of behavioral solution? Or can we really depend on ourselves to make that extra payment each and every month, perhaps automate that, but have the buffer if you need it for whatever reason?

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, I think that’s huge. And to make it even more complicated, I know when I was looking at rates, the difference in interest between the 15- and 30-year rate were significant.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Nate Hedrick: So they’re enticing you even further to go to that 15-year, and it’s like, ah, now I have to do even more math and figure out what I want to do.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely. What about points? You know, this is something that caught my attention — and we’ll talk about an example here from a listener that I think can make this process a little bit more confusing. And I know from personal experience, when my wife and I, Jess, purchased our first home back in 2009, I felt like this as I looked back through paperwork, either I didn’t have the memory of the conversation or it was so subtle that all of a sudden, you know, points were applied and I didn’t really have a full understanding of the process. And I think that’s all too common. So talk to us about what are points? Why might somebody consider them? And just make sure that our listeners feel educated and ready to have that conversation with the lender.

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, it’s funny, I’m seeing this conversation come up less and less. I feel like with interest rates where they are right now, points are not as big as they were a couple of years ago. I’m sure they’re still talked about plenty, but I just don’t see it with my clients as much. But what points basically are is a way to buy down your interest rate. So you pay some amount of money, the bank sets what those point values basically are, and you buy down your interest rate. So if it was 5% and you pay a certain amount that the bank sets to basically get that down to 4.75%, you can pay an upfront cost to reduce the interest of the life of that loan. So you know, the basic principle is that you’re giving away up front cash to pay less over the life of that loan. So in the case where you’re like, this is my forever home, we plan on being here 20 years, it may be very advantageous to give up a little bit more cash up front, knowing that you’re going to have a lower interest payment down the road. Now again, with interest payments this low as they are or interest amounts as low as they are today, I don’t see points as being quite as important. But it is a way to kind of if you really want to get that interest rate down as low as you possibly can and you’ve got some extra cash to throw at the problem, that’s not a bad way to do it.

Tim Ulbrich: And does this just come down again to running your numbers and doing a breakeven analysis, again, thinking of factors like time that you’ll be in the home and how much can you let go of that cash now, what other impact does that have on other financial goals, right? I mean, all of these variables come to play?

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, and it’s funny, this one more than any of them really matters on how long you’re going to be in the home. The bank is always going to make the points advantageous at some number — like it will be like, at 12 years, it will break even. So you’ll know. That point is very obvious. So it all comes down to how long am I going to be here for whether or not the points are worth it.

Tim Ulbrich: So let me — that’s a good segway into a question we had from somebody in the YFP Facebook group. And I think this will help us summarize a lot of what we talked about and just hear and give our listeners kind of an inside Nate’s brain look of how you think about this situation.

Nate Hedrick: Dangerous.

Tim Ulbrich: So this question to the group is, “Would you refinance your mortgage” — it comes from Alena — “Would you refinance your mortgage if current mortgage is 4.6% and new one will be 3.3%?” She goes on to say, “It will lower monthly bill by approximately $200,” so lower monthly payment about $200, “and saves $86,000 for the life of the loan.” And that would be over a 30-year fixed period. “But it will cost $10,000 in closing costs. Just want to hear your thoughts.” So Nate, how would you — obviously, we don’t know every variable here. So big asterisk in how we respond and really just meant for us to kind of talk through from an education standpoint, how would you think through this specific scenario?

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, so this is kind of the classic setup, right? The hook is you’re paying 4.6% right now, wouldn’t you rather be paying 3.3%? Everyone listening to this would say, ‘Yes, that sounds fantastic. I want to take a point and some off of my current interest.’ And then again, you take that a step further and you say, ‘How much does this reduce my monthly payment? Wow, it’s $200 a month. That’s great. What could I do with that extra $200?’ And then again, we’re like, ‘Well it’s a 30-year rate, but who cares? Look, we’re saving $86,000 over the life of the loan. Everything seems to make sense.’ Then that $10,000 number kind of jumps in at the end, and that’s when you have to have that, OK, well how long are we going to be here? Right? If I’m saving $200 a month, at what point am I going to be able to say, ‘Well, that $10,000 was now worth it?’ And how confident am I in that decision to say, I’m going to be here for 15 more years or whatever the case may be.

Tim Ulbrich: Absolutely.

Nate Hedrick: That’s when that — it’s no longer a numbers game. It comes down to what is your life looking like? And how long are you committed to that particular home? So that’s, again, this is actually exactly what I ran into when I was doing my refinance, looking oh, great, these numbers looks fantastic. Everything marches out, makes sense. But wait, how much is closing costs? Oh, I don’t know if we’re going to be here nine more years. That doesn’t make a lot of sense for me.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah. And here is a great other reminder, get out the spreadsheet, start crunching the numbers, and don’t stop at the monthly payment. You know, what we don’t know here is where they’re at in the current term. So now she’s doing a comparison over the life of the loan. So $86,000 saved over the life of the loan, $10,000 in closing costs, so we’ve got to already subtract $10,000 to say what’s the net difference? $76,000. $200 a month savings, so we know that would be $2,400 a year.

Nate Hedrick: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: So we’re looking at roughly four years to get the breakeven. But the question is how confident are you? And the second question I would add is what else is going on? So how much is that $10,000 needed or treasured? So is this somebody that doesn’t have an emergency fund, you know, is paying off lots of student loan debt, is this somebody that has other goals, wants to strategically invest, to do some other things? Maybe isn’t taking advantage of an employer match retirement account that this could help get kind of that match component if they contribute? So lots of variables here that I think would really get to, again, as we talk about over and over again on the show, not looking at one part of your financial plan in a silo but really taking a step back and saying, what else is going on? Now, if this is somebody who has no debt, every other part of their plan is humming, full emergency fund, they’ve got retirement accounts that are being maxed out, they think they’re going to be in their home forever and they’ve just got cash laying around, which sounds like a pretty sweet position to be in, right, they might look at this differently, right, than somebody else who is a little bit more pressed.

Nate Hedrick: And watch too — it’s funny. This is another great example of when the bank will come and say, ‘Well, it’s $10,000 in closing. But don’t worry, we’ll roll that into the loan.’ So now all of a sudden, your math, it doesn’t actually track as well as it did. You’re paying interest on that $10,000. So watch that. Watch where they’re going to set you upfront with here’s $10,000 in closing costs, and then they’ll roll it into the loan at the back end.

Tim Ulbrich: So one of the things I want to mention as we wrap up here is we are excited about a partnership we’ve rolled recently with Credible. And this really mirrors what we’re doing with some of the other things on life and disability of trying to bring our audience as many options as they possibly can to be able to shop around. And so Credible allows you to, on our platform, check six lenders. You can check the rate with them, and they do a soft credit pull, so it will not have a negative impact on your credit. Very quick, I went through this myself, less than five minutes, very user-friendly platform. And I will say, as somebody who did not have such a great experience with a platform like LendingTree, where I was getting harassed with phone calls for I think really, a couple months, to be honest, I thought this here, they did a nice job here of allowing you to see rates, shop things around, but I wasn’t getting hounded with phone calls. And you only have to upload documents once. So again, as we always say, just as I did, I wouldn’t stop here. I think this is a great place to start. But go to your current lender if you’re refinancing, you know, go to a different lender if there’s a unique product that’s in your area. And again, compare multiple options. And I think Credible is a great resource to get started doing that. And you can learn more and do that by going to YourFinancialPharmacist.com/reduceyourpayment. Again, YourFinancialPharmacist.com/reduceyourpayment. So Nate, talk us through, you just did this. Right?

Nate Hedrick: I closed on it less than a month ago.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and yours was somewhat unique. So I think it would be interesting for our listeners to hear that experience, your thought process, and how you arrived — even if that one may not apply to many people that are listening, I think it’s just a good reminder of thinking of all options that are out there and for them to hear how you and Kristin thought through that process.

Nate Hedrick: Absolutely. So we bought our house five years ago now. It was five years ago in September. And when that five-year mark kind of hit, that’s when I said, ‘We should probably look at refinancing. Rates are really low, we’ve been here for a couple years. Hopefully there’s some good equity built.’ So we started pursuing it, and one of the main drivers was the fact that we’d been paying PMI. So again, fast forward — or rewind before. I was a listing agent before I knew what I was doing in terms of buying a house. We bought early, we put 10% down, we said, this is going to be great. And then we were paying $100 a month in PMI.

Tim Ulbrich: Been there, done that.

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, exactly. Many, many listeners I’m sure are in the same boat. And we actually went to our lender first, and we said, ‘Hey, can you get rid of our PMI? We’ve been paying this much, we think our equity is this. I did my own listing agent appraisal, which is worth nothing, but here’s what I think the house is worth.’ So we applied and they said, ‘No, absolutely not. You have to have x, y, and z loan-to-value.’ They basically said no. So I said, ‘Fine, then I’m going to refinance out of it.’ And I started getting quotes. I went to our current lender, I went to kind of a big bank. I went to one of the lenders that I use for my investing properties, which is kind of a little bit smaller and they’re a little bit more crafty with what they can do. And I just started comparing quotes and kind of getting an idea of what the landscape looked like. And my first thing that I got hit with was, ‘Here’s all your closing costs. This is how much it’s going to cost you.’ And then Kristin and I had to have that discussion, OK, well, how long do we think we’re going to be here? And we’re really kind of in a tossup right now. I think, you know, sometimes we say three more years. Sometimes we say 10 more years. And it’s really hard for us to put a number on that. And so that made the conversation that much more difficult. So anyway, I went back to that small kind of hometown lender that we use for our investment properties and started having conversations about, what other options are there? Is there anything we need to get creative? And actually, she presented me with a pretty unique option that it’s effectively a mortgage, but it’s more of a home equity loan. So you have to have you’re already in the house. It’s only for refinances, and it’s a Home Equity Line of — it’s actually a home equity loan, a home equity term loan is what the official term is. And with this particular product, they had a deal going on where it was a new branch, they wanted to drive business and create value like every other bank, and they offered it with $0 appraisal fee, $0 closing costs, not just rolled in closing costs, but $0 closing costs. And a fixed rate interest, which is huge. No prepayment penalties. I mean, all the things that I was like, ‘Well, this is going to be the catch. And this is what’s going to stop this from working.’ But all of those things I worked through, and there was really no catch. So I had a couple more conversations. I actually called up Tim Baker, our financial planner, made sure it made sense with him too because I hadn’t seen this product before. And everybody said, ‘Yeah, this looks great. I think you’re good.’ And yeah, it’s been a really great way for us to refinance. We got our interest rate cut by a full percentage point, and we didn’t pay $1 in closing costs. The appraisal was free, all that was free. And the kicker, my favorite part of the whole process, was that again, we’d been in the home for five years, so when they came out to do the appraisal, they looked at the improvements we’ve done, they looked at the market around us. We actually — I scheduled the appraisal the day after I knew a house down the street was closing.

Tim Ulbrich: Well played, well played.

Nate Hedrick: It helps to be an agent, right? And so we had this great other property supporting our value. And we gained like $30,000 in equity — actually, $35,000 in equity from when we purchased the house. So immediately after we refinanced, we went out and we got a home equity line of credit for the extra equity that we’d built in. And it was a great way for us to kind of group those together and set ourselves up for more success.

Tim Ulbrich: Such a good example of reasons to refinance. Not only the lower rate, but obviously you mentioned the PMI piece but then also with the increase equity, opening up a HELOC option if you’re trying to do other things, which I know you are, real estate investing, things like that. So I think too, this was a good reminder — and I had a chance to talk with that institution, just trying to learn more — it’s a good reminder of just to think creatively and look at all solutions. And if I understand this specific product correctly, it’s not a new product. But it makes sense in the current interest rate market that we’re in whereas historically, maybe it hasn’t made as much sense. And what I’ve found is that as I compared that option for us where we think we’re going to be in the home for a very, very long time, it wasn’t as competitive rate-wise.

Nate Hedrick: Right.

Tim Ulbrich: But I think that was what was unique about your situation is that perhaps there’s a move in the shorter term. And to find a solution that had maybe not the best rate but a close rate but didn’t have all the costs up front made sense for your situation. So I think, again, just a reminder that there’s not one solution that fits everyone out there.

Nate Hedrick: And for us too, it didn’t even reduce our monthly payment. I think I mentioned already, but we dropped from a 30-year, which we had paid five years on, down to a 15-year loan, so the idea being that if we are here for a little bit longer period of time, now we’ve got — we’re overall reducing the cost of the total cost of the loan by taking off that 10 years. So we didn’t actually reduce our payment by that much every single month, but the overall value of it was there.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. So Nate, this is great stuff. And as always, love having you on the show, picking your brain. Here, we’re talking about refinancing. But I know there’s some listeners that maybe aren’t in a refinance situation, might be looking to buy for the first time or they’re in a home and instead of looking at refinance, they want to actually move to another home. And then I think we’ve got that unique connection with you and the concierge service that we do with obviously you wearing the dual hat of a pharmacist as well as a real estate agent. So tell our listeners more about for those that are in that situation, either buying for the first time or looking to move, where they can go to learn more and what that service is all about.

Nate Hedrick: Yeah, absolutely. So through our partnership together, we’ve kind of launched the YFP concierge services, which is a great home buying experience you can take part in for absolutely free. The way it works is you work with me, we have a 30-minute planning call, kind of go through some of your priorities, talk about budget, talk about what you’re looking for in a home, location, all that great stuff, to figure out what’s going to be a good fit for you. And then I actually set you up with a local real estate agent. One of the things that I do is interview a bunch of local agents in the area that you’re looking, make sure I’ve got somebody that’s going to line up with your priorities and what you have in mind. And then I get you guys connected and I stay a part of that process the whole time. So we’ve had a number of clients actually go through the concierge services to find a home. We’ve had some in Baltimore, I’m working with one in Washington right now. We’re kind of all over the place, which is really fun. And it’s been a great way to if you don’t know the area very well or if you don’t know any agent in the area or you just want that peace of mind knowing that you’re going to get somebody really good that’s been vetted by another real estate agent, it’s a great opportunity to kind of work with us to make sure that you’re getting the best experience possible.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. So to our community members, you can go to YourFinancialPharmacist.com, and then we have a page you’ll see there, you can click on at the top. We have a header “Buy or Refi a Home.” And from there, we have an option to find an agent, and you’ll see more information about being able to connect and work with Nate. So Nate, thank you as always, and looking forward to having you on at APhA this year. So for our community members that will be at APhA, Nate will be joining us out there at the booth. So we hope you’ll stop by and say hello. And as always, appreciate your contribution to the show.

Nate Hedrick: Happy to be here, as always.

Tim Ulbrich: Awesome. And as a reminder to our listeners, if you like what you heard on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, please leave us a rating and review in Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to your podcasts each and every week. Have a great rest of your week.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 138: What You Need to Know About Retirement Accounts in 2020


What You Need to Know About Retirement Accounts in 2020

Tim Baker, our own fee-only CERTIFIED FINANCIAL PLANNER™, joins Tim Ulbrich to talk about key retirement and tax numbers for 2020 and the SECURE Act.

Summary

There have been several changes to retirement account contribution limits for 2020. In addition to these changes, the SECURE Act was passed at the end of 2019 which also carries several changes that affect retirement savings. On this episode, Tim Ulbrich and Tim Baker dive into some of these changes.

Although the increase in contribution limits is small, this will hopefully allow pharmacists the opportunity to save a larger portion of their salary to meet their retirement savings goals quicker. To start, 401(k), 403(b), Thrift Savings Plans and most 457 plans have an increased contribution limit of $19,500 with a catch up amount of $6,500. IRA accounts are typically used to supplement 401(k) or 403(b) accounts. While the contribution limits for 2020 are the same, what’s changed is the phase out numbers. Those filing married filing jointly aren’t eligible to contribute to traditional IRAs after earning a modified AGI of $206,000 and for those that are single that eligibility ends at a modified AGI of $75,000. There have also been changes to the Roth IRA and HSA deduction limits.

Tim and Tim also discuss the SECURE Act (Setting Every Community Up for Retirement Enhancement) which is effective January 1, 2020. This act carries several changes in retirement taxes, but three main changes are the change in the required minimum distribution age (RMD) to 72 years old, the elimination of an age limit for traditional IRA contributions and access to retirement benefits for part-time workers. Tim and Tim also discuss changes in 529s and the requirement for plan administration to offer projections for lifetime income and nest egg information.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Ulbrich: Hey, what’s up, everybody? Welcome to this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast. Tim Baker is back on the mic to join me as we nerd out for a little bit about changes to retirement accounts in 2020 and the recently enacted SECURE Act, including what you should know and the implications this may have on your retirement savings strategy. Tim Baker, welcome back.

Tim Baker: Hey, Tim. What’s going on?

Tim Ulbrich: What’s new and exciting in Baltimore?

Tim Baker: Oh man, just living the dream, yeah. I feel like I’ve been awhile since I’ve been on the podcast. I feel like I keep saying that. But yeah, things are good. Family’s good, good Christmas. And what’s good on your end?

Tim Ulbrich: Going well. I can’t complain. Excited to have you back on the mic. I know we’ve been doing the Ask a YFP CFP segment. We’ve been bringing you on, and we would encourage our listeners to continue to submit questions if you have them. That’s been fun. But exciting year ahead, looking forward to the American Pharmacists Association meeting coming up. Hopefully we’ll see many of our listeners out there as well in your backyard in D.C. So it’s going to be a fun year. We’ve got a lot of exciting things planned for YFP. OK, so we’re going to tackle, as I mentioned in the introduction, these important updates as it relates to retirement contributions in 2020, the SECURE Act. So first, let’s talk about changes to retirement savings contribution limits. And we’re going to nerd out a little bit here on numbers, but we’ll link in the show notes to some articles that if our listeners want to go back and see these numbers, reference tables, they can do that easily without having to worry about jotting them down or hearing them and remembering them. So we’ll go through that, and then we’ll dig into the SECURE Act a little bit further. So here we are, a new year, 2020, which means new limits on retirement savings accounts. And while we’re not going to in this episode dig into the ins and outs of investing, including terminology, how to prioritize savings, we did already talk about that in detail in our investing month-long series in November 2018, which included episodes 072, 073, 074, 075, 076. And we’ll link to those in our show notes. So Tim Baker, let’s start with the changes to 401k, 403b, Thrift Savings Plan and most 457 plans, which for the sake of our discussion, we’re going to group those together. So refresh our memory on how these accounts work and then the changes to contribution limits on those accounts in 2020.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so most of us have the 401k, a 403b, if you’re a Tim Church of the world and work for the VA or the government, the TSP, the Thrift Savings Plan. These are retirement plans that are typically sponsored by the employer. And the 2019 limits were $19,000. Going forward in 2020, they’re actually $19,500. And the catchup limits if you’re out there and you’re age 50 and older, the catchup limit after you’ve reached that age goes from $6,000 to $6,500. So again, these are typically the contributions that are coming out of your paycheck that get automatically contributed into this account and then invested for the purposes of retirement. So a little bit — and these get adjusted pretty regularly. I feel like when I was studying for the CFP way back when, these were in the $17,000 or $18,000.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I remember that.

Tim Baker: And then they creep up. And it’s just kind of to account for inflation and that type of thing.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, and I think this number is important. So we’re talking about $19,500, obviously we’re talking about pre-tax savings here. So these are going to be taxed later on at the point of distribution. And we’ll talk about required minimum distributions here in a little bit as we talk about the SECURE Act. But I was thinking about this this morning as I was driving in, Tim, $19,500. While that may seem like an insignificant jump from $19,000, if you look back to when they were in the $17,000s — and I also think about this in the context of pharmacists’ salaries that are remaining somewhat stagnant or even in some spaces getting adjusted down, I think that these numbers continue to go up. And we’ll talk about the same thing on the IRA side. What this means for pharmacists is likely, in many cases perhaps, a greater opportunity to save a greater percentage of their salary if that’s something that they’re able to do. And just to refresh our memory, this does not include employer matches, correct?

Tim Baker: Correct. This is just your own contribution through your paycheck. It does not include what an employer matches. So that limit is actually much, much higher.

Tim Ulbrich: OK. So $19,500, as I mentioned just a few minutes ago, we’re not going to talk in this episode about the priority of investing, whether that be 401k, a 403b, or should you be putting money in an IRA? But we did talk about that back in the fall of 2018. OK, so what about IRAs, Tim? Give us again a brief overview of IRAs, the limits that we’re seeing for 2020 and the catchup provisions as well.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so the IRAs are pretty stagnant. So just to back up, the IRA is typically what you use to supplement what you’re putting into your 401k, 403b, so it’s something that you typically open up yourself, either at a Vanguard or Fidelity, a TD Ameritrade, and basically set it up and fund it yourself. Or you can do it through a financial advisor as well. The amounts are pretty much the same from 2019 to 2020. It’s still $6,000 that you can contribute into a traditional IRA and a Roth IRA in aggregate, meaning if you put $4,000 into a traditional, you can only put $2,000 into a Roth IRA. And just to back up a little bit further, Tim, just when we think of Roth, a Roth IRA, we think of after-tax. So typically, the example is if you make — and we’ll use lower numbers because of the number phase out — but if you make $50,000 and you put $5,000 into a Roth IRA, you’re taxed on $50,000. You get no deduction. If you make $50,000 and you put money into a traditional IRA, it’s as if you’re taxed on $45,000. So your taxable income goes down. So that money inside of the IRA grows tax-free. And then when it comes out, if it’s a traditional, which it hasn’t been yet taxed, it gets taxed. If it’s a Roth, which has already been taxed going in, it doesn’t get taxed. So the thing to remember is it’s either taxed going in or taxed going out. The growth it enjoys in the middle, in the actual pot, is tax-free. So the numbers are the same between 2019 and 2020. What is a little bit different are the phase-outs. So those inch up a bit. So as an example, if you’re a single individual in 2019, if you made $64,000-74,000 in Adjusted Gross Income, the deduction that you would receive would slowly go away. And then anything over $74,000, you would get no deduction. For 2020, that goes up $1,000, so now it’s $65,000-75,000. So typically the people that I’m talking to that still get a traditional IRA deduction are you students, residents, fellows out there that are going that route. And then same thing with on the Roth side of things. So once you make a certain amount of money, you can’t even contribute to the Roth. And that’s where we can kind of talk about the back door Roth conversion. So for 2019, for a single individual, once you made $122,000-137,000, it would start to phase out the contribution that you could make in there. Once over — and now in 2020, it goes from $124,000-139,000. So it goes up a touch. So if you’re in that low $120,000s, you can still put money into a Roth. But if you start creeping up to that number, then obviously the door slams shut and then we typically do a non-deductible traditional contribution that we bought back door into a Roth. So — and we’ve done, I think we’ve done podcasts on that before, I think Christina and I.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, we have. Episode 096 with Christina Slavonik, How to Do a Back Door Roth IRA, so I would point you to that episode. So just to summarize, Tim, contribution limits for IRAs remain unchanged from 2019 to 2020, $6,000 in 2019, $6,000 in 2020. But what we did see is some changes to the income limits going up in terms of where those phaseouts and contributions are allowed. So we’ll link again in the show notes to some articles of tables that you can look at those in more detail. So if we put the two of these together, Tim, we know for many pharmacists, you know, they’re thinking about saving for retirement in the context of a 401k, 403b, TSP, 457, as well as an IRA. So now between the two of those, excluding the employer match portion of a 401k, 403b, we’d be looking at north of $25,000 that they’re able to contribute between those. So not too bad, right?
Tim Baker: Yeah. And the other thing that we haven’t talked about that’s worth mentioning is the HSA. So the HSA has changed a bit, you know, for — this is assuming you have a high deductible health plan, you can couple that with a Health Savings Account, which for a single individual, the contribution amount moves from $3,500 to $3,550. So a little bit. And then the minimum annual deductible moves from $1,315 to $1,400. And then for a family, it’s $7,000 to $7,100 and then the deductible moves from $2,700 to $2,800. So that is, again, we’ve talked about that I think at length before. That’s the black sheep of all the different accounts out there because it has that triple tax benefit, which is a really nerdy way to say it goes in tax-free, it grows tax-free, and then it comes out tax-free if it’s used for qualified medical expenses or once you reach a certain age, you can use it for whatever you want. And the nice thing about that, Tim, is that it doesn’t matter how much money you make. You could make $50,000 or $50 million. You still get that deduction, that $3,550/$7,100 deduction.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, an extra $50 or $100, you know, matters, right? So from $3,500 to $3,550 for individuals in 2020, and up from $7,000 to $7,100 for individuals that have family high deductible health plan coverage. So we talked about HSA, we’ve talked about IRAs, we’ve talked about the 401k, 403b’s, etc. And so again, I think the take-home point here is making sure people are aware of what these contribution limits are, how they’ve changed, and what opportunities they have for them because ultimately, as we think about prioritizing savings and how this fits in with the budget and where you’re going to allocate your dollars, these three buckets typically are a big part of the long-term savings strategy. And really taking the time to say OK, among all of these priorities, these options that I have available here, obviously you’ve got other options in the brokerage market as well, what am I going to be doing in terms of savings? And which of these do I have available to me? And we know that HSAs aren’t available to everyone, but it seems to be we’re seeing this certainly is a growing area. And I would reference our listeners all the way back to Episode 019, where we talked about how HSAs fit into the financial plan. Obviously, the numbers then were different than what we’re talking about here. But the concept of the HSA remains the same. OK, so that’s Part 1 where we wanted to talk about the 2020 contribution limits and the changes and make sure our listeners are ready. One thing I want to ask you, Tim, before I forget and we jump into Part 2 here and talk about the SECURE Act, remind us of the timing of when those contribution periods end. So end of calendar year, going up until the tax limit deadline of April 15, so when — what is the timeline if somebody is listening who said, “You know what? I could have contributed $6,000 in a Roth at the end of 2019, but I only did $5,000. And here I am at the end of January. What options do I have?”
Tim Baker: Yeah, so for most of these retirement plans — not necessarily the 401k, the 403b, but for the IRAs — you can contribute all the way up until April 15 of this year for 2019.

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: Now a callout here because I’ve seen this with our own custodian who we manage client accounts with, and I’ve actually seen it when I logged into a client’s Betterment account here recently because we were in the process of moving that over. It’s kind of a weird thing, so I would caution — or I’d have our listeners look at this is the — when you turn the calendar — so let’s pretend, Tim, that you have at the end of 2019, you have $4,000 into your 2019 IRA contributions. So you still have $6,000 to go, right?

Tim Ulbrich: Yep.

Tim Baker: When the calendar turned — I’m not sure because I don’t know all the custodians — that January contribution actually gets counted towards 2020, which makes no sense at all because most people, the reasonable thing is like OK, fill the 2019 bucket before you start doing 2020. So you actually have to go back to the custodian, like Betterment or in our case, TD Ameritrade, and say, “Hey, let’s backfill that bucket that we still need to kind of top off before we go into 2020.” So it’s just one of those things that we have this first quarter of sorts to finish off our contributions. But the logic in a lot of these — you know, the way we contribute to our IRAs is just flawed, in my opinion. And I’ve seen this pop up a few times. So definitely something to kind of call out if you are doing this on your own.

Tim Ulbrich: So is the suggestion there then they reach out to the custodian and make sure that gets allocated correctly?

Tim Baker: Yeah. Like to me, and to me, it’s like something that I, I’m kind of talking to TD and some other institutions like why is this a thing? You know, 99 out of 100 people I would think would say, OK, if I still have 2019 contributions to make, it should be coded — I’m not a developer — but it should be coded as such as a default. So what I do is I would log in and typically, when you log in, you can see your contributions year-to-date, and it will show you basically in this period of time, it will show you your 2020 contribution, which should read $0, and your 2019 contribution, which should be — if it’s not $6,000, you should still basically backfill that until you go to 2020. It’s just this weird quirk that — and I kind of expected more from Betterment because they’re a newer kid on the block, and it was just one of these weird things that’s off. So to me, it’s use all of that up before you go onto the kind of the current year.

Tim Ulbrich: Come on, Betterment. We expect more. No, I’m just kidding.

Tim Baker: I know, I know. I don’t know, we’ll probably get a letter from them, like an angry letter.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, I’m sure. Yeah. Alright, let’s jump into the SECURE Act. We’re going to continue to nerd out a little bit here as we transition from numbers to talking about some recently enacted legislation that has fairly significant implications.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And really a shoutout here to Tim Church, who kind of brought this forward to say, hey, we need to be talking about this. There’s some really unique provisions in here that may apply directly to our audience or at least to be aware of as we think about retirement saving strategies for the future. And I think in the midst of end of year, as this was passed at the end of December, obviously we’ve got a lot going on at the federal level that I think is drawing attention away from things like this. I think it got lost in the mix. So let’s talk for a moment, Tim, just start with what is the SECURE Act? And then we’ll talk about specifically some of the major changes that may be of interest to our audience.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so the SECURE Act stands for Setting Every Community Up for Retirement Enhancement, SECURE Act of 2019. These acronyms kill me. And being former military, I can appreciate a good acronym, but come on. So this is really the second piece of major legislation in the last 24 months, the first being basically the Trump tax code, the Tax Cut and Jobs Act, which had pretty fairly sweeping changes. And this is really — you typically don’t see this in a 24-month period. These typically happen over decades. And when we actually dug into the Act, pretty significant. This was passed by the House I believe in May. And then language in the Senate, and we kind of thought it would be buried. But in kind of the final days of the year, I believe it was passed on the 20 of December. It became law and actually became effective on January 1 of this year. So I was caught a little bit off guard, to be honest, about the big change. And I had heard about it and was kind of following it from a distance. But when it actually came through, I was actually surprised because obviously, with everything going on Capitol Hill, it’s just a lot swirling around. And they were able to actually get something done.

Tim Ulbrich: Well, and I think to be fair, like things don’t typically move this quickly, right? So we see something that passes December 20, 2019, and then with a couple exceptions here, really the Act is effective January 1, 2020, although some of the pieces are coming further behind that. But I think there’s some major, major things in here. And we’re not going to hit everything about the SECURE Act or we would I think put our audience to sleep, perhaps induce a couple car wrecks for those that are driving. So we’re going to hit the high points. We’re going to link in the show notes to some additional information that our listeners can go learn more about this. So please don’t interpret that we’re talking about every single piece of the SECURE Act. But why don’t we start, Tim, I think what really got a lot of press, even though it may not apply directly to where our audience is today, is around the changes in the required minimum distribution age. So talk to us about what that is. It’s not a concept we’ve talked a lot about on the show. And then what were some of the changes that happened related to that distribution age from this Act?

Tim Baker: Yeah, so — and I have a pretty, I want to say a pretty great graphic that I designed way back when that I sometimes will dust that off. But to kind of talk about RMDs, so — and maybe we need to post that somewhere. But so an RMD, a Required Minimum Distribution, is basically — so let’s pretend, Tim, you have a bunch of retirement accounts. And you have $1 million in a 401k, $1 million in a traditional IRA, and $1 million in a Roth IRA. How much money do you actually have? The answer is not $3 million, unfortunately because those — the traditional IRA and the 401k are all basically pre-tax dollars. So Uncle Sam has yet to take the bite of the apple. So when that gets distributed, they basically take their taxes. So in those $1 million accounts, if you’re in a 25% tax bracket, you get to keep $750,000. And then they keep $250,000. The Roth IRA, because it’s gone in after-tax, it goes free. It comes out tax-free. So after awhile, you know, after you work and you retire and you reach 70.5 years old, the government raises their hand and says, ‘Hey, Tim Ulbrich, remember all those years when we allowed you to basically have that money grow tax-free? We want our piece. We want our piece of the apple.’ So what they do is they force a required minimum distribution, which it looks at the balance of the account and then a ratio based on your age, and it applies it to that. And let’s say the first year, when you’re 70.5 years old, you have to distribute $2,000. And then every year, it gets bigger.

Tim Ulbrich: So it’s a forced contribution — or a forced withdrawal, right?

Tim Baker: It’s a forced withdrawal, right. So then you can invest that somewhere else or spend it or whatever. But for a lot of people that are like, oh, I don’t really want to use this money. I want to keep it growing so it kind of can be a disruptor, especially if we’re moving retirement to the right, which we’re seeing. So the big change, which is — I think it’s really a minor change because I think like it’s something like only 20% of the people are actually being forced to take RMDs. Most people are spending it down before that. I believe that’s the number. It moves from 70.5 years old to 72 years old.

Tim Ulbrich: OK.

Tim Baker: So they give you a little bit more runway on the back end to not have to touch those kind of those pre-tax accounts, which is typically the IRA, the 401k, 403b, that type of thing.

Tim Ulbrich: So it gives you an additional year and a half to let that money sit and grow before you have to take those forced withdrawals. But I think this — I’m glad we’re having this discussion because, you know, we talked before in the investing series about some of the strategy around taxable — you gave a great example. You’ve got three buckets of $1 million in a 401k, traditional IRA, Roth IRA, you don’t really have $3 million for those two. Now the third one, in the Roth IRA account, you’ve got $1 million there.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think that’s one of the other advantages of a Roth account is you don’t have a required minimum distribution age, if my memory serves me correctly.

Tim Baker: Correct. Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: So you know, again, if we think about what’s happening to lifespans and as you think about where you’re at in your retirement savings and the potential whether you will or will not need that money at that age, I think that’s a really important consideration as we think about retirement savings strategy. Even though this year and a half may not be, you know, something that is monumental, I think it’s just a good reminder of how we’re thinking about the back end of taxes when it comes to our savings.

Tim Baker: Yeah, I kind of like the — it’s like, to me, it’s like who makes these rules up? It’s like 59.5 years old, 70.5 years old. It’s like, can we just use round numbers please? It’s like what? And again, it kind of is like the theory versus the application. And it’s just — it’s crazy. Yeah, I don’t understand it.

Tim Ulbrich: So in addition to the change in required minimum distribution age, we also saw that there is no longer, with the SECURE Act, no longer an age limit for traditional IRA contributions. So you know, again, obviously it may not be as meaningful for our audience in the moment. But this is really, really significant news in that previously, you couldn’t make traditional IRA contributions if you were 70.5 or older, but that’s no longer the case, right?

Tim Baker: Yeah, and it’s kind of — to me, I’m still kind of unsure how this works because if you think about it, it’s like, so you would basically be able to — now you’re able to contribute that if you’re still working and you have compensation, you can still contribute to a traditional IRA. And before, you couldn’t once you reached age 70.5. So they take that age limit off. I guess the question I have is like, OK, let’s pretend I’m 73 and I’m still working. Do I take a RMD and then just put it right back in?

Tim Ulbrich: Oh, right.

Tim Baker: You know what I mean? I don’t know. And I actually just thought about this now. Before, once you reached 70.5 years old, you typically just put it into a Roth. But again, like the idea is that the government wants you to spend that traditional, that pre-tax bucket down because they want their tax revenue. But I guess you can, I don’t know, maybe you can contribute that? I don’t know, I don’t know.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, maybe if we asked the representative that posed that about the age as well as that provision, maybe we’ll get a “I don’t know,” you know?

Tim Baker: Yeah, yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And talk about that.

Tim Baker: Yeah, so you take the money out and then you just contribute it again? I guess if you have compensation, I guess that’s OK. But yeah, so again, what they’re trying to do — and I think we’re going to see more and more of this because I think the whole of traditional retirement, it’s going to go away. And I think they’re going to — even like the 10% penalties and things like that, I would imagine in 10, 20, 30 years, it’s going to look a lot different.

Tim Ulbrich: I would agree. So third thing here I want to talk about, because I think especially as we’ver seen more pharmacists that are transitioning to part-time work for a variety of reasons, is some interesting changes to your access to retirement benefits for part-time workers. So here we’re talking about employer-sponsored retirement plans. So talk to us about where we’ve been on this — and you know, this was actually kind of new news for me as I got up to speed — where we’ve been and what’s changed here as it relates to part-time workers and access to retirement benefits that are employer-sponsored.

Tim Baker: So one of the ways that a lot of employers are kind of getting around some of the costs of manpower and FTEs is to hire mostly part-time employees. And one of the reasons they could do this is if they had a 401k, you could basically exclude that from as a benefit. So the rule before the SECURE Act was that part-time employees who have worked 1,000 hours or more during the past year must be granted access to the 401k. That rule stays the same with the SECURE Act. The difference is now that part-time employees who have worked more than 500 hours per year for three consecutive years now must be allowed to enter into the 401k. Now, the caveat here, Tim, is that this sounds great. And I think we’re in alignment, obviously we’ve set up our 401k recently at YFP and we’ve included our part-time employees as part of that because obviously this is kind of the stuff that we talk about and we believe in it. The problem with this rule, though, is that the earliest a part-time employee can participate in a retirement plan due to this kind of second three-year rule that’s now still with the 1,000-hour rule doesn’t take effect until 2024.

Tim Ulbrich: Right, because of the delay.

Tim Baker: Yeah, the plans don’t start counting until 2021.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah.

Tim Baker: So it’s good, but not for a couple more years. So I think we’re heading in the right direction. And again, I think what we’re seeing — and sometimes we hear it on the trail with politicians — is that one of the problems is employers are just hiring temp workers and part-time workers, which — it’s really because of an economics play because the true cost of a full-time employee with health benefits and retirement benefits and all that kind of stuff can be pretty steep. So I think this is a step in the right direction to kind of open up the door for a lot of part-time employees to save for retirement.

Tim Ulbrich: I agree with you. I think it’s a step in the right direction. I think the time period, because of the three years, because this doesn’t start until 2021, I’m a little bit disappointed by that. I mean, to me, this is a sooner rather than later thing. And I think from what I was reading, it looks like there’s still final rules that are in development here. So I think this is a stay-tuned type of thing. And to be clear here, this does not mean that employers have to contribute in terms of a match but rather that they will be required to allow the employer to participate if they meet the requirements that are set forth and that we just talked about.

Tim Baker: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: And I share — you know, I’m pumped about what we’re doing at YFP in this area and some of our other benefits that we’re offering. I think it’s — it’s fun to be probably one of the most rewarding parts of 2019 is to be thinking about it from an owner’s standpoint of saying, “How do we want to invest in our employees? Why do they matter?” And philosophically, we’ve all been in employee roles and here we now are on the other side of it and how can we enact things that will increase employee satisfaction, retention, or we just feel like is the right thing to do?

Tim Baker: Yep.

Tim Ulbrich: What about — I mean, I think those got a lot of the headlines. What were some other things that stood out to you in the SECURE Act that, you know, might have been or is of interest to our audience?

Tim Baker: It’s funny because I was actually just talking about this. We do — as part of our financial plan, we do like an education presentation. And I’m going to have to go back because I was like prophesizing about, ‘Oh, I think the 529 will look a lot different in the future and blah, blah, blah,’ and I had not dug into the specifics about it yet. But so a little bit of the backdrop is that the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act a couple years ago expanded the use of 529s for K-12 expenses.

Tim Ulbrich: K-12, yep.

Tim Baker: Which was big because basically before that, the 529 was kind of like the retirement account for education where you had this long accumulation phase before your kid was born to 18, and then you would basically decumulate when they went to school. Now, the 529 — and now I say ‘now,’ but a couple years ago when they changed it, it could actually act as a pass-through. So you could put money in to get your state tax deduction and then pay for private kindergarten, first grade, etc. So the further expansion in the SECURE Act, the SECURE Act qualified education loan repayment is that it allows the 529 to basically distribute to make loan payments, which sounds like it would be an automatic thing. You have loans, and we have a balance in the 529, like that should have happened before. But the law basically includes an aggregate lifetime limit of $10,000 in qualified student loan repayments per 529 per planned beneficiary and $10,000 per each of the beneficiaries’ siblings. So again, you know, maybe not like a — I think this is a good foothold, but to me, I don’t think there should be a limit, to be honest. If there’s a 529 balance, put it towards the loans. So now homeschooling expenses still didn’t make the bill. They didn’t make an effort —

Tim Ulbrich: Come on now!

Tim Baker: I know, it’s like, get with the program. So still, that needs to happen. And then the second thing that happened is that, with the 529, it includes expenses for apprenticeship programs now. So if you’re going for an apprenticeship or your kid’s going for an apprenticeship, fees, books, supplies, required equipment, the program does need to be registered and certified with the Department of Labor, but that’s big. And that’s one of the things with a lot of parents that are like, ‘Well, what if little Johnny doesn’t want to go to education — get college?’ And my belief is that still, I think we’re going to keep going in that direction of opening up what the 529 can actually be used for. We just need to. We need to.

Tim Ulbrich: Yeah, that one, although it seems small, got me fired up, you know, in a positive way. I just think that we’re seeing certainly a transition of more people going into trades and other things.

Tim Baker: Yeah.

Tim Ulbrich: And I think from a parent concern, it’s something I think about often that hey, I’ve got four boys and maybe two go to college, two don’t, maybe four don’t, maybe four do, whatever. But to have that flexibility, you know, and that option available I think is huge. And I agree with you, I think we’re going to see more in this area. There were certainly other changes in the SECURE Act. You know, one of the things that stood out to me was a new requirement for plan administrators to offer projections for lifetime income at least once a year, info about the nest egg size, so you know, we might see, individuals might notice some more paperwork and things that are coming as a part of their 401k. But lots of changes here, and I’m glad we were able to talk about these as well as the 2020 changes to the contribution limits in the retirement accounts and the HSA component that we talked about a little bit earlier. So Tim Baker, excited to have you back on the mic. And I think this is a good place to remind our listeners as we’re talking about saving for retirement and new contributions and how do you prioritize these and where does this fit in with the rest of your plan, we offer fee-only comprehensive financial planning at Your Financial Pharmacist. Obviously, you’ve been leading that service for us. And we’ve got some exciting developments coming in 2020 with that. And if you want to learn more about that, YFPPlanning.com, you can set up a call with Tim Baker and see if that’s a good fit for you. And then we’ve also got some great calculators that Tim Church has been working on, one of them around projecting retirement savings and nest egg, so you can find that over at YourFinancialPharmacist.com. As always, if you liked what you heard on this week’s episode of the Your Financial Pharmacist podcast, don’t forget to leave us a rating and review in Apple podcasts or wherever you listen to your podcasts each and every week. Thank you for joining us, and have a great rest of your week.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]

YFP 137: How to Monetize Your Clinical Expertise


How to Monetize Your Clinical Expertise

Diana Isaacs joins Tim Church on this side hustle edition to talk about her journey in becoming an expert in diabetes and how she has been able to monetize her clinical expertise through speaking engagements, advisory boards, consulting projects and CE articles.

About Today’s Guest

Diana Isaacs, PharmD, BCPS, BC-ADM, BCACP, CDE is the Continuous Glucose Monitoring (CGM) Program Coordinator and Endocrinology Clinical Pharmacy Specialist at the Cleveland Clinic Diabetes Center. Her role includes clinical practice, teaching, and research. She provides medication management and runs a robust CGM shared medical appointment program.

Summary

Diana Isaacs shares how she monetizes her clinical expertise in diabetes on this side hustle edition.

Diana’s training after graduating college was in pharmacy practice and ambulatory care. She gained clinical expertise and took additional training to receive certifications and specializations. She fell in love with diabetes and started working more and more in the field. She now works as a Continuous Glucose Monitoring (CGM) Program Coordinator and Endocrinology Clinical Pharmacy Specialist at the Cleveland Clinic Diabetes Center. Diana was recently awarded the 2020 AADE Diabetes Educator of the Year.

Her passion for diabetes is palpable and has allowed her to become an expert in the field. When she’s working at night on her side hustle as a clinical diabetes expert, she doesn’t feel as though she’s working but more that she’s doing a hobby she loves. She’s monetized her passion and expertise in several ways, including speaking engagements and presentations, advisory boards, consulting projects and CE articles and courses. She earns the most from honorariums which varies between $500 to $3,000/event. Advisory boards come in occasionally and bring in between $1,000 to $2,5000/board. Diana receives $500 to $4,000/CE article and if she works on a consulting project she usually earns $1,000 to $2,500.

The biggest reason for her success has been her willingness to say yes to opportunities and to reach out to organizations or conferences in which she’s interested in speaking.

Diana says it’s hard to quantify how many hours she works, however she makes it happen! Her side hustle has increased over time so she didn’t feel the brunt of working several additional hours on top of her day job at once. She has a very supportive husband that works part-time and is able to take on more with the children and household tasks. She works at night after her children go to bed but takes off Saturdays and Sundays when she can to make sure she’s present for her children and husband.

Mentioned on the Show

Episode Transcript

Tim Church: Diana, thanks for stopping for and for being part of this side hustle edition.

Diana Isaacs: Oh, you’re welcome. Thanks so much for having me.

Tim Church: I first want to congratulate you on your recent award. And that is the 2020 AADE Diabetes Educator of the Year. And this is an award that honors a diabetes educator who has made a special contribution to the field through dedication, innovation, and sensitivity in patient care. Now Diana, this is a really big deal, and I wanted to ask you, what does winning this award mean to you?

Diana Isaacs: Oh, well thanks. Yeah, it’s been a really exciting year. Winning this award has been tremendous. I mean, I’m so grateful to be recognized for it. And it’s definitely opened up a lot of opportunities for me in terms of it almost seemed like overnight, people were like, oh, she’s an expert in diabetes. And it’s given me a lot of new opportunities to pursue.

Tim Church: That’s great. And when was the last time a pharmacist won this award? Because this isn’t something specific to pharmacists. This is really anybody in the diabetes space.

Diana Isaacs: Yeah, that’s one of the things I really love about the organization AADE, the American Association of Diabetes Educators, is that it is, it’s a multidisciplinary. You’ve got nurses, nurse practitioners, DAs, exercise physiologists, you’ve got dieticians, you’ve really got everybody. And so it’s just — it’s really special I think to be recognized by all the different disciplines. And in terms of the last time a pharmacist, I think when I looked it was like 12 years. So it definitely had been a long time.

Tim Church: That is so cool. And it’s really awesome to see you being recognized because as we’re going to jump into, you really have done a lot for diabetes in terms of your scholarship activities and a lot of the committees and things that you’ve been on. So I’m excited to jump into that. But obviously getting this award is not something that happened by accident. So I want you to talk a little bit about your career path.
Diana Isaacs: Yeah, sure. So let’s see. Going all the way back, I graduated from SIUE, it’s about 10 — actually exactly 10 years ago now. I did a pharmacy practice residency with an emphasis in ambulatory care at the Philadelphia VA. And then I was really fortunate to get my first position as a clinical assistant professor with a practice site at the VA, getting to manage diabetes. And I think through that, I really was able to gain clinical expertise in managing different types of patients and seeing different types of things. And I pursued my certifications, like my CDE and the BCEDMs, I’m board-certified in advanced diabetes management. And really, I think one of the things that really stands out is I say yes. I definitely say yes to different opportunities and also seeking out whenever there was an opportunity to be able to speak at a meeting, whether a local program or anything, really trying to grow myself professionally.

Tim Church: So a lot of those opportunities, did you have to be very intentional about getting? Were some of those given to you?

Diana Isaacs: So that is a great question. So yeah, the golden ticket, right, is when you get one of those emails that says, “Hey, will you do this? And we’ll pay you all this money, and we’d like you to present here and write this.” Those emails come sometimes, and they have fortunately come more often since getting this award, but no. For the most part, I sought things out. When I saw that a meeting was accepting abstracts to be able to speak, I drew up an abstract and I submitted it. I, you know, submitted lots of proposals for lots of different things. I worked really, really hard. And some of the things stuck, and many times, they didn’t get accepted. But I kind of just kept trying.

Tim Church: And did you have any failures along the way when you submitted those proposals?

Diana Isaacs: Well, I don’t like to think of it as failure, right? Because you’re trying to think of it as you’re growing. But yeah, I like to think of it as like I throw 100 darts at a board, and two of them stick. And that’s great. I’ll pursue those two things. So yeah, I feel like I apply for lots of things. I’ve tried to really do a lot of different things and yeah, sometimes I don’t make it, they choose someone else, I don’t get it this time, but I just kind of keep trying. And I really try to keep my ears open for opportunities. That’s something I’ve been pretty good about paying attention, you know, sometimes you get those emails where it’s like, you can apply for this. Like for example, with the American Diabetes Association, they have these special interest groups. And I’ve been wanting to get involved with ADA, and so I applied for that. And I ended up being appointed as communication director for the pregnancy and reproductive health group. And that was just an opportunity that hey, I paid attention to my email, I filled out the application, I submitted it. And it worked out. So I think, you know, a lot of it is reading your emails and seeing what opportunities are out there.

Tim Church: At what point in your career did you realize that you had become an expert and really had authority in this space?

Diana Isaacs: So I don’t — I guess I’m still growing, and I like to think I’m still definitely growing and evolving and there’s so much to learn with diabetes that I don’t know if anyone is a full expert. But I think, you know, definitely earning this award this year has solidified some of my confidence. And I think over — especially in my current position, so right now, I’m at the Cleveland Clinic Diabetes Center. And I think in this space, I see such complex cases. I get to do so many cool things here that I think I just realized, you know, when I interact with other people that I am seeing a lot more, a lot more diverse things that I’m becoming an expert, I guess you could say.

Tim Church: So what would be some of the examples of complex cases or things that maybe most pharmacists kind of in an amb-care setting may not see every day?

Diana Isaacs: Yeah, so I get to do a lot of work with the post-kidney transplant population. And that’s a lot of fun. So there, we do a bunch of kidney transplants there. And unfortunately, our patients were kind of falling through the cracks. That was a need when I came here, that they weren’t getting good glycemic management right after that transplant. It was hard to get into endocrinology. So that’s a service that I took on. And now I see a lot of those patients. And so it’s just, it’s very interesting because they’re on high dose steroids, they’re tapering over a month’s time, they just had a transplant so they’re acutely sick. Many of them, even if they didn’t have diabetes before, now they have steroid-induced hyperglycemia, and it’s really an art to it because there’s no specific protocols. It’s really every person’s different, and you have to very closely manage it. And then in addition to that, sometimes you see the pancreas-kidney transplant. Like I have a patient this week, she had it, and you know, you would hope, right, the dream is that if you get a pancreas transplanted, you don’t need insulin anymore. But it doesn’t always work like that. They call it like angry pancreas. Like it takes some time for that new pancreas to adjust. So then we have her on Metformin and like we’re trying to see, are we doing a DPP4 inhibitor and what else are we going to do? And so it’s just — man, it’s a lot of cool stuff, a lot of cancer patients, a lot of just everything, like post-bariatric surgery, hypoglycemia, people doing keto and de-escalating therapy, lots of CGM, diabetes technology, insulin pumps, just lots of cool stuff here.

Tim Church: So it sounds like that the providers are how they come in through the clinic, they’re like if they’re complex or it’s going to be difficult, we just send them to Diana. Is that pretty close to how it works?

Diana Isaacs: So I am so fortunate. I work with like the most amazing doctors, and I have an amazing, amazing team. So what I try to do when coming here — because I was the first full-time pharmacist put into the diabetes center — was I tried to find where would I be most useful? And some of the areas I recognized that were one, we were underutilizing diabetes technology, so like insulin pump adjustments and getting more patients on CGM. And then the kidney transplant need was really two areas where I decided that I would really be best utilized, and so those are kind of niches that I’ve I guess developed. But yeah, I try to be helpful wherever I can for the team.

Tim Church: That’s really cool, and I think those are obviously niche areas within diabetes itself, but through the organization that you work for, obviously if those are very frequent types of patients that are coming in, there’s certainly going to be a need. And I think that’s really cool how you positioned yourself to basically say, what are the needs out there and how can I best be a part of this service and impact patient care in that way? So I think that’s really cool the approach that you took.

Diana Isaacs: Thanks. Yeah, and I try — you know, a lot of times, pharmacists will come and ask me what they can do and how they can get involved, and I think it’s really every place is unique and it’s about assessing the needs and making sure you’re not stepping on other people’s toes but you’re adding value to the team.

Tim Church: So besides kind of positioning yourself as an expert by taking on very difficult cases, very unique cases that many people may not see all the time, you know, one of the things I thought about prior to our interview was the book “Outliers” by Malcolm Gladwell. And essentially, one of the conclusions of that book is that in order to become an expert, you need 10,000 hours. So a lot of people out there — obviously you don’t become an expert, you don’t become a member of the Beatles like overnight. The Beatles don’t become The Beatles overnight. It takes a lot of time and practice in order to get to that point. So what do you think about that in the context of your personal journey?

Diana Isaacs: Yeah, that’s a great point. And yeah, hard work is required. I mean, I work hard. But the thing is, it’s not boring or tedious. I just, like I really love diabetes. And I love that I can use my skills in diabetes to be able to help people. Almost 10% of people now have diabetes. So wherever I am, I’m able to make an impact and to directly help people. And so like for me, I love doing it so much that I don’t think of it as work. Like if I am working on a project or I’ll do this stuff in the evenings, and I don’t really think about it because I’m enjoying doing it. But absolutely, like the hard work is necessary. And I think on one hand, that should be inspiring because it’s not that you have to have like some special secret skill or talent. Like every person or every pharmacist should know, like if they work hard enough in a certain area, they can become a clinical expert.

Tim Church: And I think too — and I think obviously, you’ve already kind of talked about this, but just that repetition of seeing the number of patients over and over and over, and you start to develop certain patterns. You know, obviously you’re going to have some complex cases that you’ve never seen before, but it’s almost kind of like it adds to the — your own repertoire of knowing OK, I’ve seen a patient like this in the past and this is how he or she has responded. And I’ve kind of instilled that in the training programs is when we take residents — because for those that don’t know, I also do primarily diabetes management, but I’m always pushing the residents and students to really see as many different types of patients as possible because that repetition is so key, even if it seems monotonous and tedious at the time.
Diana Isaacs: Yeah, and I think the great thing about kind of the ambulatory care environment too is you’re interacting, you’re communicating with different types of people. So you can always learn from every person. And so that’s really the art of it that makes it really unique and something — I have a lot of trainees, a lot of residents and students that I work with. And that’s something, you know, you can have two exact same clinical situations but what you do may be different depending on like the patient’s attitudes and other factors. So yeah, that communication and, like you said, repetition, is very helpful for navigating different situations.

Tim Church: So who or what really inspired you to become an expert? I can tell like just from your voice, obviously this is where you’re already passionate about. But is there anyone who inspired you to basically continue to achieve, continue to get to the next level?

Diana Isaacs: Yeah. So I want to highlight, so Jess Kerr, who is faculty at SIUE where I went to pharmacy school, was very inspiring. She was faculty and had a practice site — or still has a practice site at the VA. And I wanted to do what she did. I guess that passion I saw, she had that passion for helping people and I really wanted — she seemed so happy — and I really wanted to be that. I was very fortunate to get a position like that. I think something else that actually stands out is my math teacher, actually in high school. I had a really bad attitude about math. And I was like, fine, like this is too hard. Like I’m just getting C’s, like I don’t care. This is just way too hard, I don’t feel like doing it. But she invested all this time in me. And she encouraged me to have a positive mental attitude, PMA, and she said things like, “Dream it. Believe it. Achieve it.” And that really shifted things. Like I learned that my attitude really dictates how situations will turn out. And just through changing my mindset, having a positive attitude, things can go really well. So I turned myself around, I went from C’s to A’s. And I think that that message really stuck with me in a lot of different areas, not just pharmacy and diabetes but in other areas of my life too.

Tim Church: That’s really cool. And I think that a lot of people, they would not be where they are unless they heard some message, received some encouragement from somebody. So that’s cool. And I think it’s great that you highlighted those individuals. So obviously you’ve reached this expert status in managing diabetes and along with that comes some engagements and proposals and things where you can really show off those skills but also help other clinicians help patients. So talk about some of the ways that you were able to start monetizing your clinical expertise.

Diana Isaacs: Yeah. So it’s been exciting because I’ve done a lot of things over my career for free, put a lot of sweat and tears — not usually tears. But yeah, now I’m getting paid to actually speak and things like that. And I love — it happens to be that I love giving presentations. And so that now, you know, I get paid to give presentations. And part of actually what I’m doing with this Educator of the Year is I get to give presentations and then beyond the five that I will give and that I kind of already received an award for, I can do additional ones where they pay me and I’ve been able to set my price. And so that’s been exciting. And then another side benefit has been that industry has been interested in me too. So now I’m speaking for DexCom as well as I’m on the speakers bureau for Novo and for Zerus, and so that is very exciting.

Tim Church: So take a step back for the award, the Diabetes Educator of the Year, they’re already guaranteeing you five speaking spots? And are those individual speaking gigs, those are paid for? Is it one lump sum that they’re giving you?

Diana Isaacs: Yeah, so what happened is I got $5,000 up front for that. And in that, I agreed to speak at five places, which I got to choose — or places could request me, and then I got to choose from the list of people that requested me. And then beyond that five, then additional places can request me. But they won’t get the financial assistance. So they would have to pay for my travel and then pay for my honorarium on their own.

Tim Church: So besides speaking, what are some of the other ways you’ve been able to monetize?

Diana Isaacs: Yeah, so things like CE articles, so places like Pharmacy Times, Power Pack, they will basically — they will pay you to write CE articles or like give webinars. So that’s one thing I’ve been able to do. Also, like in the webinar and course development — so I actually do a lot of stuff with AADE. There’s a whole CGM course. And it’s going to be turning into a certificate. But I was involved in that. And so that’s led to a lot of honorariums along the way. We even most recently created videos for it on how to counsel on CGM. And so there’s been a good number of honorariums for that as well.

Tim Church: That’s great. So can you break down kind of the different ways you’re earning and what they would typically provide in terms of an honorarium? And that could be like a range.

Diana Isaacs: Yeah, so it really varies a lot from place to place. Like some places, you do a local program, and you speak, and you get $1,500. And that’s to cover — it usually would be like a one-hour program. Depending on the company, sometimes they’ll give you the slides. And sometimes, they’ll have you pick from slides or they’ll let you put together slides, depending on how much freedom you have. Usually, many places will pay — if it’s not done that way, they’ll pay you an hourly rate and then they will pay for presentation development. So like usually, that honorarium ranges from I would say from $200-300 an hour. And so that would, you know, if it takes 10 hours to prepare, say that would be $2,500. And then the presentation itself usually will be like a $2,000 honorarium as well. So I would say like usually, when I speak, I’ll get anywhere form like $1,000 to $5,000. $5,000 being the best and not usually so normal. But that’s kind of a range. And then they pay for travel and hotel and all that, flight and all that good stuff. Recently, I was asked to speak as part of this diabetes program, which is training people for CDE. And that, I think we agreed on like $600 per hour of speaking. But that wouldn’t be prep time, that would probably just be like the time. So if I speak for five hours, then it’s $3,000. So that’s kind of for the speaking stuff, that’s usually how it works out.

Tim Church: And then have you been able to cross — I mean, obviously with AADE, ADA, those are multidisciplinary organizations — but have you gone and done presentations specifically for physicians, for nurse practitioners, physician assistants?

Diana Isaacs: Yes, so I was just recently asked to speak for like the dietician organization. So I think that’s beginning to happen. I was asked to speak also for ADA post-grad sessions, which is in early February. So that’s exciting because that’s an organization, there’s a lot more physicians in that organization. And of course, I do a lot of speaking AADE. So I think I’m starting to tap into these other organizations as well.

Tim Church: You mentioned to me before we jumped on the call that besides speaking, besides CE articles, some of the other ways you’ve been able to monetize have been being a part of advisory boards and then also consulting. Can you talk a little bit about that?

Diana Isaacs: Oh yeah. Advisory boards are like the greatest thing in the world. They’re usually like these — it’ll be like four hours and you’ll get paid like $250 an hour, plus if there was any travel. But the best is when they’re local, and you just like go for four hours and you get $1,000. Those are wonderful. I love when those happen. Other things, like for consulting, just different types of like writing or I get asked a lot of stuff about CGM type of stuff. Like now, I’ll be working on a supplement for the Diabetes Educator for InPen by Companion Medical, so stuff like that pays. Oh, recently I got asked to do this Medscape thing, which that sounds actually really cool. It’s like about time and range. And they’re — I guess it’s more kind of like an interview. They asked me to pick a nurse that I like working with, so I picked my favorite nurse. And we’re going to go I guess to like New York to film this brief thing. But that was like another kind of cool thing that I was like, oh, wow. That’s interesting. So all that stuff’s been cool. And I guess one of the things I’ve learned is, you know, I’ve done lots of things for free in my life. And I love doing it. So sometimes, it’s like easy to get to be like, oh yeah, I’ll just do this. But recently, I’ve tried to set my boundaries that hey, if someone’s asking for a good amount of my time, to make sure that I am getting paid fairly for my amount of time.

Tim Church: Sure, I mean, I think that’s absolutely reasonable. And you’ve done a lot of the things in the past to get to the point where you are where you weren’t necessarily compensated. But I think it’s incredible all the different ways you’ve been able to monetize. And obviously, along the way, you’re providing a lot of value, whether that be organizations or education that ultimately gets in the hands of patients itself, which is really cool. Can you break down in terms of percentages — so all of these different things that you’re doing to monetize — can you break down kind of what is the highest in terms of bringing in the revenue? Without specific amounts, just kind of what percentages does speaking bring in versus advisory boards, consulting, CE, etc.?

Diana Isaacs: So I think speaking definitely brings in — if it’s like a big program where — like I’ll give you another example. Like at AADE, I had a bunch of presentations, but then I had this one presentation, it was sponsored by Abbott. And so the honorarium was like $2,000. So that’s something that just brings in money, I feel like quickly, especially if it’s a topic that I’m pretty comfortable with. Like another example was a CE article that I did, it was also on CGM, and that paid $4,000. And so those are topics I’m very comfortable with. So those are easy and much faster, I guess, to earn the money. Other things, like writing sometimes. You know, writing can take awhile, so especially if it’s a topic you’re less familiar with. So now I try to stay in the diabetes realm. But I actually, like last year, I wrote an article about hyperhidrosis, which was not as familiar to me as other disease states. So that one took a little bit more time. So I guess what I’m saying is it’s hard to completely break it down. But I think for sure speaking, advisory boards pay a lot, but those are really unpredictable. So you know, I could have two advisory boards in one month or I can go almost a year without an advisory board. It’s just, it really depends on the needs of the company and what area they’re targeting and everything. So I think it just really varies. Another thing that brings in revenue, though, which is kind of cool, is speaker training. So whenever you speak for one of these companies, they want you to get trained. And so like that, that’s amazing because you get your hourly rate for a bunch of hours and you’re not presenting or anything, you’re just learning. And so that’s pretty cool.

Tim Church: How does that work?

Diana Isaacs: Yeah, so like with Dexcom, I was really fortunate because I missed the original training, and two people came out to me and like just trained me for four hours. And like I earned $1,000 and it was amazing. Other ones, like I’ve been invited now for this year to go to a Dexcom and to a Novo training. And so those, I’ll be flying out to like to Florida in the winter, so it’s not like it’s so bad. I think the other one’s California. But it’s just basically like a day, and they’ll be paid an hourly rate. And the good thing about those is it will be with other people on their speakers bureau. So the opportunity to interact — but those are really interesting because you learn more about their product. And so I mean, I just find it’s incredibly helpful and interesting, and I get to earn money. So it’s really awe — I mean, it’s really cool to get to do that kind of stuff.

Tim Church: Yeah, it sounds like you’re getting just a tremendous amount of opportunities, which is really cool. Would you say that now at the point of where you are that most of these opportunities are already being asked of you where you’re not having to reach out as much anymore to get them in motion?

Diana Isaacs: So yes and no. So yeah, like fortunately with the pharma stuff, that’s been really exciting. But I think it goes both ways because I was pretty interested in Zerus and definitely let them know that I was interested in being a consultant for them. I’m definitely getting asked more, but I’ll tell you, there’s still things I apply for. So I think it depends the caliber of what it is. I am, fortunately, getting asked a lot more. But there’s certain things that I — I’ll give you an example, OK? So this isn’t so like — this makes sense. So like ADA Standards of Care, I would like love more than anything to be on the committee that develops the standards of care, OK? So that’s something you have to apply for. So that is something that I hope to apply for and if I were to get selected for something like that, that would be like a career dream. So I think it goes both ways, maybe my dreams are even higher now than they were before. But yeah, I still, I’m open to new opportunities and still — will still apply for things.

Tim Church: So looking back, now that you’ve obviously been able to monetize, you’ve been able to bring in extra income, what are you doing with the additional income that you’re bringing in with your side hustle?

Diana Isaacs: That is also a great question. So honestly, I just live my — I don’t want to stress about money, and I think bringing in the extra money allows me to live a very comfortable life without stressing. I work very, very full-time between my regular job and all these extra consulting opportunities. My husband, fortunately, is able to work part-time, which is good because then someone is home more for the kids and I feel like we have more balance, and he’s able to take care of some more of the stuff at home. So I think for us, it’s just really about not having this stress, being able to buy what we want, and then whatever extra, college funds, all that good stuff.

Tim Church: Cool. So how much time do you think in most weeks you’re spending kind of on consulting and all these other activities that are outside of your scope of your full-time positon?

Diana Isaacs: Yeah, that’s hard to quantify. I will say every Saturday, I completely disconnect and I am not using the phone, I’m not working, I’m like really just with the family. So I always have that day. And even Sundays, I try to really make family day. And I’m fortunate that I have a position that’s Monday through Friday so that I have my weekends off. I try really hard to do my extra work in the evenings when my kids go to sleep and like evening-weekend — or weekend-evenings. I try not to take too much time away when my kids are awake. It’s definitely a balancing act. I feel like I make it work. I don’t know. Maybe it seems like I work a lot, but I try — somehow, it all works.

Tim Church: I was going to ask you, what other tips do you have? Because I mean, you’re doing so much, you have a family, I mean, I think a lot of people when they think about the thought of taking on something in addition to their full-time job, it almost seems like it’s impossible.

Diana Isaacs: So I guess it’s built up like over time, so it hasn’t felt like oh, it’s this massive thing all at once except when I have an article that’s due and I waited until the last second to do it, which isn’t great. But I don’t know, I just, I don’t do — like I don’t watch TV really. I don’t go to movies, I try to minimize distractions. I’d like to say I’m perfect about social media, but I definitely like to post things on Twitter and stuff. But I try to really minimize the outside distractions. And when I am home with my family to really focus on my kids and not be distracted. And that way, when they go to bed, like I can really devote my time, you know, like whatever, from 8:30-10 on whatever I want to work on. So I just — and I think I just love what I do. I just love it so much that for me, it’s like my hobby, right? Like if someone else likes to paint or likes to do whatever, they would make time for that. So for me, this is kind of like my hobby. I just really enjoy it. And so I just — like I make time for it.

Tim Church: And it sounds like too that it sounds like your husband is very supportive in you doing these extra activities and things like that. And obviously, you said it makes it a little bit easier that he’s part-time. But would you say that he’s played a big role for you to be successful with all these other ventures?

Diana Isaacs: Oh my gosh, yes. Yeah. I mean, he’s the only reason that I can do what I do. He’s like really good at managing the kids, going grocery shopping, like he’s really on top of it, but also I have cleaning help. Like that’s a must. I definitely, I have cleaning help, a lot of cleaning help. So that’s another thing I use my money for lots of cleaning help. But yeah, I mean, you have to have that support. And he knows that I love doing this stuff, so he is supportive as long as I’m not out of town too much. And that’s the part I have to balance because all these speaking gigs, trying to just make sure — I like to be home on the weekends when I can and stuff. But yeah, it’s a balancing act, but it’s fun.

Tim Church: Well, Diana, this has been a great time. And obviously, it’s just cool to hear your passion in your voice. I mean, obviously, this is an area where you’ve become an expert and be able to impact not only clinicians but patients just in your full-time job but with all the work that you do. So what tips or suggestions would you have for others who want to become an expert in a particular clinical area?

Diana Isaacs: So this is going to go against all that burnout, resiliency talk that you hear. But just say yes. Like this whole thing about saying no to avoid burnout, I just, I disagree with it. And I think in order to be an expert, to have new opportunities, you’ve got to say yes. You’ve got to open yourself up to that because you never know, like when you say no because you’re worried, oh, it might overwhelm you, what you’re going to miss out on. And the thing is when you say no a lot, that really closes doors and people don’t want to ask you again. So I just, I like really encourage people to say yes or at least really, really think about it before being so quick to say no. And then the other thing is just look for those opportunities. Don’t expect that people are going to hand you things. You do have to work hard. It doesn’t happen overnight, but that’s OK. And just look for new opportunities.

Tim Church: Diana, if somebody wants to learn more about you and what you’re doing, what’s the best way to reach out?

Diana Isaacs: Yeah, so you can email me, you can find me on Twitter, @DianaMIsaacs. Yeah, I’d be happy to chat with anyone who’s interested in talking. So yeah, feel free to shoot me an email. If we’re going to one of the same meetings, we can meet up there. So yeah, happy to connect with anyone who’s interested.

Tim Church: Diana, thank you so much for coming on the podcast, sharing your story and your tips and suggestions. It’s been a lot of fun.

Diana Isaacs: Oh, you’re very welcome. Thank you so much for having me.

Current Student Loan Refinance Offers

Advertising Disclosure

[wptb id="15454" not found ]

Recent Posts

[pt_view id=”f651872qnv”]